advertisement
Solution 6000
Security Systems
EN
Installation Guide
Security System
ii
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
CO PYR I G H T N OT I C E
Unless otherwise indicated, this publication is the copyright of Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd (“Bosch”).
All rights are reserved.You may download a single copy of this publication. By downloading the publication you agree that you will: (i) only use the publication for your own reference; (ii) not commercially exploit or charge any person for the use of the publication; and (iii) not modify the publication in any way without the prior written permission of Bosch. Except as specified above or where authorised by the Copyright Act 1968 (Cth), no part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, modified or stored in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Bosch.
T R A D E M A R K S
Throughout this document trademark names may have been used. Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrence of a trademark name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement of the trademark.
Warnings
1) This product must be installed by a qualified
and licensed security installer.
2) This product may not perform as expected if
installed incorrectly.
3) Some features of this product, including but not
limited to Back to Base reporting, SMS and
Email Reporting and Automatic Time and Date
Adjustments require a working telephone line to operate and telephone communication service provider charges are applicable
4) Australian standard AS 2201 requires regular
service by qualified and licensed security persons and regular user testing. Please consult your security alarm company for further details.
5) Incorrect programming of parameters can result
in operation contrary to what may be desired.
6) Leave the mains adapter plugged in at all times.
7) Leave the telephone line plugged in at all times
under normal conditions.
8) The Product Identification Label for this product
which is supplied in the resistor pack, must be affixed to the outside of the enclosure during installation.
N OT I C E O F L I A B I L I T Y
While every effort has been taken the accuracy of this document, neither Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book.
Should you find any error on inconsistency, please notify us accordingly.
S o l u t i o n 6 0 0 0
Intrusion Control Panel
TELEPERMIT
Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at any time without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement.
T E L E P E R M I T N OT E
The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates
Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions.
This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.
The transmit level from this device is set as a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone.
TELEPERMIT
CC610 Alarm System may be connected to the
Telecom Network
PTC 211 / 13 / 050
9) This equipment shall not be set up to make
automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111’ Emergency
Service.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
CONTENTS
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I iii
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 5
iv Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 6
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I v
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 7
vi Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 8
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I vii
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
viii Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 9
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I ix
x
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 10
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I xi
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 11
xii Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I xiii
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Contents
SECTION 12
SECTION 13
SECTION 14
xiv Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 1
Overview
F E AT U R E S
Listed below are the main features of the Solution 6000
Control Panel.
♦
Individual Box Tamper Circuit Monitoring
♦
Report Via Email (Internet)
♦
Telephone Line Busy Tone Detect
♦
RAS Intelli-Connect® CLI Caller Line Identification
♦
Daylight Savings
♦
Senior Watch
♦
System Maintenance Interval Reminder
♦
System Weekly Test Reminder
♦
Area Inactivity Interval
♦
Temporary PIN
♦
Dual Reporting
♦
Dual Redundant Reporting
♦
Alarm Report Abort/Cancel Options
♦
8 Programmable Holiday Calendars
♦
16 Programmable Door Assignments
♦
8 On-board Zones (Exp To 144 Zones)
♦
Fire Alarm Verification
♦
255 PIN Users
♦
4 Supervised High Power Digital Outputs
♦
1 Relay 2 Amp Form (C) Contact (Expandable to 32)
♦
Supervised Siren Driver
♦
Partitionable To 8 Areas
♦
Dialler Reports SIA, Contact ID, SMS and Email Formats
♦
Supervised LAN Keypads (Maximum 16 Keypads)
♦
Keyswitch Input
♦
1000 Event History Log Memory
♦
EMI / Lightning Transient Protection
♦
Fully Menu Text Programmable
♦
Programmable Via Solution Link Software (Remote/Direct)
♦
Telephone Line Fail Monitor
♦
Time Executed Functions
♦
60+ Output Event Types
♦
Exit Restart
♦
Expansion Module Supervision
♦
DTMF Tone Decoder Built In
♦
Remote Arming
♦
IP Reporting Via CSV-IP, Conettix, MyAlarm
O V E R V I E W
Zones
The Solution 6000 control panel provides up to 144 separate zones of protection. Zone programming determines the panel’s response to open/short and tamper conditions on the zone loop.
Areas
The control panel supports up to 8 separate areas. You can assign all zones to a single area, or you can assign each zone to a combination of different areas.
You can arm and disarm the control panel by area, alternatively, you can arm and disarm several areas at the same time.
Dialler
The control panel has a built-in dialler to send reports to the receiving party (ie. Security company monitoring station, mobile phone etc).
Keypads
You can connect a maximum of 16 fully supervised keypads to the control panel. The available current affects the total number of keypads that you can connect without the need to provide additional power supplies.
History Log
The control panel can store up to 1000 history events from all 8 areas. All events are stored in the log, even if they are programmed not to report via the on-board dialler.
You can view the control panel’s history log via keypad, serial printer (optional), or by connection of a personal computer (direct/remote) using the Solution Link upload/ download software.
Programming
You can program the control panel either by a keypad or using a personal computer using the Solution Link upload/download software.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
1-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Overview
This page left intentionally blank
1-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 2
Installing the Hardware
A B O U T T H E PA N E L
E N C LO S U R E S
The MW720B - Small Enclosure and MW730B - Large
Enclosure have been designed to reduce installation time and improve aesthetics on larger installations where often multiple enclosures need to be located in close proximity to each other.
A number of new features have been incorporated including a new style tamper bracket which can be easily installed before or after the enclosure is mounted to the wall, an anti tamper lid which insures the cabinet tamper triggers when the lid is removed, easier access for flexible and rigid conduits, additional 20mm cable entry knockouts and a new board mounting system using removable spring clips.
The MW720B and MW730B enclosures include numerous holes, allowing the PCB mounting clips to be positioned in the most appropriate location for each installation.
MW730B - Large Cabinet
Use appropriate fasteners capable of handling a minimum of 12kg to fix the cabinet against a sturdy surface using the mounting holes provided.
I N S TA L L I N G T H E TA M P E R S W I TC H
The tamper switch can be located on either the left or right hand side of the cabinet to suit the installation. Before installing the bracket, fit the tamper lead to the switch and then insert it into the bracket.
Once the enclosure has been mounted to the wall, insert the tamper bracket into the rectangular hole in the top flange of the enclosure and then slide the base of the bracket toward the top until the tamper switch locates in the rear of the enclosure.
Depress the tamper a few times with your finger to ensure smooth operation.
i
Note
For ease, it is recomended that the PCB mounting
clips are installed from the rear of the enclosure before mounting it to the wall.
3mm Philips Head
Machine Screw
Supplied
Circuit Board
Component Side
Support Clip
Press Fit Supplied
Rear of Cabinet
Figure 1: PCB and Mounting Clip Installation Diagram
E N C LO S U R E F I X I N G M E T H O D
MM720B - Small Enclosure
Use appropriate fasteners capable of handling a minimum of 6kg to fix the cabinet against a sturdy surface using the mounting holes provided.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Figure 2: Tamper Bracket Installation
E N C LO S U R E M O D U L E S PAC E S
The MW720 enclosure has space for 2 large modules or
4 small modules while the optional MW730 enclosure has space for up to 4 large modules or 8 small ones. The enclosures have been designed so that any combination of large and small units can be neatly mounted together on the wall.
Each module is mounted to the enclosure using 4 or more clip in standoffs. The clips can be inserted from the rear of the enclosure before mounting it to the wall, or from the front of the enclosure after it has been mounted. Both methods should be performed using your finger tips to
2-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware prevent damage to the standoff. (Standoffs and screws are supplied with each module).
All compatible add on modules will mount on these spaces. See below for list if modules which can be added to the control panel.
Module
Solution 6000 Control Panel
CM704B Zone Expander
CM705B Universal Expander
CM710B Output Expander
CM720B LAN Power Supply
CM760B Real Time Clock
CM797B LAN Isolator Module
CM195B RF Receiver Expander
Table 1: Expansion Options
Space Occupied
2 Module Spaces
1 Module Space
2 Module Spaces
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
1 Module Space
Use the above table to help determine which size cabinet you will require for the job.
On some export models, one module space will not be available as the mains transformer mounts in this location.
I N S TA L L I N G PA N E L S A N D M O D U L E S
Once the enclosure is secured in place, install the panels and modules onto the mounting clip using the supplied
3mm screws. Do not over tighten the screws.
When fitting panels or large modules, you should use 5 mounting clips, one in each corner of the PCB and one in the middle of the PCB underneath the main terminal blocks. When mounting small modules, only 4 clips are required, 1 in each corner.
Figure 3: MW720B - Small Enclosure Details
Both enclosures are supplied with tamper switches, tamper leads, tamper brackets and a quantity of mounting clips and screws. If required, additional mounting clips and screws may be purchased in bags of
50 clips (10 packs x 5pcs). (P/N: MW890)
Figure 4: PCB Mounting Clip
The following example shows the MW720B -Small enclosure configured using 4 small modules.
i
Note
The supplied mounting clips are designed to use the
3mm machine screws supplied with the enclosure.
The use of self tapping screws will damage the clips.
2-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Figure 5: MW720B Configuration Examples
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
320 mm
C C
B
A A A A
B
A
A
D
A
D
A
A
A A
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
A A
A A
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
A A
A
A
A
A A
D
A
A A
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
A A
B
A A A
A
A
B
C
D
A = PCB Mounting Clip Holes
B = Enclosure Mounting Holes
= Tamper Bracket Mounting Holes
= Earth Stud - 4mm
Figure 6: MW730B - Large Enclosure Details
The following examples show the MW730B - Large enclosure configured using 6 small modules and 1 large module.
2-3
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
When installing large modules you should fit 5 mounting clips as shown.
Clip 5 provides support under the main terminal block only. No screw is fitted.
CO N N E C T I N G T H E B AT T E RY
The panel is supplied with a set of battey leads to suit the chosen enclosure. Connect the Red Battery lead to the Battery (+) terminal and the Black Battery lead to the
Battery (-) terminal on the PCB.
Once terminated onto the PCB connect the other end of the leads to the battery paying attention to the polarity.
1
2
4
MODULE
SPACE 1
5
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
MODULE
SPACE 2
MODULE
SPACE 3
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
MODULE
SPACE 4
MODULE
SPACE 5
3
AC MA I N S T R A N S F O R M E R O P T I O N
On models with an internal transformer, a permanent connection shall be made to the mains supply. See
Figure 8. This must be completed by a suitably qualified electrician according to the applicable wiring standards and regulations.
Next connect the transformer output wires (red) to the removable terminal block supplied and then connect it to the PCB. Always check the orientation of the terminal block with the PCB markings before connecting.
i
Note
For permanently connected equipment, a readily
accessable disconnect device shall be installed in a location near to the equipment.
Transformer Output
(Red Wires)
Wiring must be carried out by a licensed electrician following applicable wiring standards
CABLE ENTRY (REAR)
1
MODULE
SPACE 6
2
MODULE
SPACE 7
4
3
B
D
A
A
Transformer
Input
(Blue Wires)
TRANSFORMER
220 - 240V A.C.
50-60Hz 150mA
FUSE
8AG - 250V
250mA MAX
NEUTRAL
EARTH
ACTIVE
FUSED
C
A
A
When installing small modules, you should fit 4 mounting clips as shown.
Figure 7: MW730 Configuration Examples
CO N N E C T I N G P O W E R TO T H E PA N E L
For normal operation, the panel requires both AC and DC power sources. The AC source can be provided either by an external adapter or by an internal transformer depending on the model and country of sale.
When connecting using the AC adapter, feed the cable in to the enclosure and terminate the wires on the removable terminal block supplied before connection it to the PCB.
If using a 3 wire Adaptor, then the earth wire should also be terminated onto the terminal block. Always check the orientation of the terminal block with the PCB markings before connecting it to the PCB.
2-4
A = PCB Mounting Clip Holes
B
C
D
= Enclosure Mounting Holes
= Fused Terminal Block
= Transformer
Figure 8: Internal Transformer Connection Diagram
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
PA N E L L E D I N D I C ATO R S
The control panel PCB has two LED indicators (Dialler and
Status LED’s) which display the following information.
Condition
Off
On
Flashing
Meaning
Offline
On Line (Dialling/Answered)
Incoming Call
Table 2: Dialler Indicator LED
Condition
Off
On
Flash Once Every 2 Seconds
Flash Fast
Meaning
Error
Error
OK
AC or Battery Trouble
Table 3: Status Indicator LED
i
Note
During factory defaulting the Status and Dialler LED
indicators will flash alternatively for approximately
15 seconds.
A B O U T T H E K E YPA D
The keypad has 20 keys that allow you to input instructions and navigate the programming menu’s as required. Some keys have a secondary function which is activated by pressing and holding them down for two seconds. Each key is described below.
Key
to
Description
The numeric keys allow you to enter your user PIN when required.
Use the [MENU] and the numeric keys to enter commands. The [MENU] key is also used to go back one level when navigating through menus or to exit a programming location without saving changes.
The [ON] key allows you to turn an area or output on. To turn all areas on at the same time when the system has been partitioned, press and hold the [ON] key for two seconds.
The [PART] key allows you to turn an area Part On. This key can also be used to bypass a zone or multiple zones when you press and hold for two seconds after you enter your PIN.
The [OFF] key allows you to turn an area or output off. To turn all areas off at the same time when the system had been partitioned, press and hold the [OFF] key for two seconds after you enter your PIN.
The [OK] key allows you to save any changes and exit the command.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
Key Description
The [MAIL] key allows you to read stored mail. This key can also be used to initiate a dialler test when you press and hold for two seconds.
The [] key allows you to move the cursor left when programming text or telephone numbers.
The [] key allows you to move the cursor right when programming text or telephone numbers.
The [
↑] key allows you to navigate through menus or to toggle characters when programming telephone numbers.
+ for 2 sec
The [] key allows you to navigate through menus or to toggle characters when programming telephone numbers.
Pressing The [] key will display current trouble conditions when the area that the keypad is displaying is disarmed.
Press and hold the [] and [
↑] keys together for 2 seconds will initiate a panic emergency alarm to be triggered.
If programmed, the sirens will sound and the monitoring station will be notified.
+ for 2 sec
Press and hold the [] and [] keys together for 2 seconds will initiate a fire emergency alarm to be triggered. If programmed, the sirens will sound and the monitoring station will be notified.
+ for 2 sec
Press and hold the [
↑] and [] keys together for 2 seconds will initate a medical emergency alarm to be triggered.
If programmed, the sirens will sound and the monitoring station will be notified.
Table 4: Keypad Key Functions
Figure 9: Keypad Emergency Alarm Trigger’s
i
Note
In previous versions, the hold down emergency alarm functions using the arrow keys failed to operate when initiated using graphic keypads that have built-in smart card readers. This included keypad fire, keypad panic and keypad medical emergency alarms.
In version 2.14, the hold down emergency functions using the arrow keys now function correctly.
2-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
S TAT U S I CO N S / L E D ’S
The following table lists the function of each of the ICON symbols and LED indicators on the keypad display.
Icon
Status Meaning
The keypad can be programmed to display area icons (1 to 8) that allow users to easily identify which areas have been turned on or off without the need to toggle between areas (See MENU 6-1-
4).
On
The area is turned All On or Part On
Off
The area is turned Off
Flashing
Fast
The area has an alarm
Red
LED
On
Flashing
System power is missing
Flashing
A fire alarm is active
Off
On
On
Off
Flashing
On
No fire alarm
Fire alarm in memory (Turn the area
All On and Off to Clear).
The existing service or trouble condition has been acknowledged.
No service or trouble conditions exist
A service or trouble condition is present that has not been acknowledged.
The area is turned Part On.
Off
On
Off
On
System power is normal
The area is not turned Part On.
The area is turned off.
The area is turned All On or Part On
The area is turned All On or Part On
Off
On
Off
Flash
On
The area is turned Off
All messages have been read.
Message queue is empty
An unread message is in the queue.
Area is ready to turn on
(All On / Part On)
Not ready, Zone Open
Off
On
All On
Flashing
Alarm
Green
LED
On
Area is off.
Flashing
Area not ready to turn on
Red &
Green
LED
Flashing
Installer programming mode is active.
The Wi-Fi enabled keypad or module has successfully connected to your local Wi-Fi network.
The Wi-Fi enabled keypad or module is not connected to your local
Wi-Fi network.
Table 5: ICON & LED Indicator Meanings
K E YPA D TO N E S
All keypads emit several distinct tones and display text to alert you to system events. The volume of the keypad tones can be adjusted in MENU 6-0-7.
Type
Fire
Alarm
Tone
Burglary
Alarm
Tone
Meaning
When a fire zone sounds an alarm, the keypad will sound 3 seconds on and 2 seconds off
(repeat).
When a burglary zone activates while your system is turned on, your keypad emits a continuous siren tone. It sounds for the time set by your security company.
Trouble
Tone
Key Press
Tone
Entry
Delay
Tone
Exit
Delay
Tone
When a system component is not functioning properly, your keypad sounds 4 fast short beeps followed by a 5 second pause (repeat).
Pressing any key on the keypad sounds one short beep, indicating that the key press is accepted.
When you enter the premises through a zone programmed for entry delay, the keypad sound a Hi/Low tone to remind you to turn off the area. If the area is not turned off before the entry delay expires, an alarm condition will sound and a report may be sent to your alarm company.
After you turn an area All On, the keypad will sound 1 short beep every second. During the last 10 seconds fast short beeps will be heard.
If you don’t exit before the delay time expires and an exit delay door is faulted, an alarm occurs.
Error
Tone
Menu
Mode
Chime
Tone
If you enter an incorrect value when programming, the keypad will sound a 2 second tone.
The keypad will sound a Lo/Hi tone to indicate you have entered MENU Mode and a Hi/Lo tone to indicate you have exited MENU mode.
The keypad sounds fast short beeps to alert you when a zone programmed for chime is faulted or unsealled.
Table 6: Keypad Tones
2-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
i
Note
In previous versions, when a user turns an area off
at a keypad and a trouble condition is present, the keypad would display a trouble pop-up box, but the
RED status led may fail to turn off.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
13
14
15
16
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
Table 7: DIP Switch Address Settings
On
On
On
On
K E YPA D & R E A D E R S S E T U P
The control panel can have a maximum of 16 keypads and/or readers connected via the LAN terminals. Each keypad or reader must be set to a unique address before they will operate.
Each keypad or reader needs to be assigned to a home area via MENU 6-1-3. This sets the area the keypad or reader will display and control by default. Keypads and readers can be locked to a home area or allowed to roam or move between areas. At factory default, the home area is factory default to operate Area 1.
Set each keypad or reader address using "Table 7: DIP
Switch Address Settings" on page 2-7 and "Table 8:
Rotary Switch Address Settings" on page 2-7 as a guide.
i
Note
In version 2.14, this has been corrected so that the
RED status led will turn off when the user turns off the area via the keypad regardless of any trouble events being present.
Only 1 keypad can be assigned to each address. All
keypads are supplied from the factory set to address
1. (OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF).
D I P S W I TC H A D D R E S S S E L E C T
4
Figure 10: Keypad DIP Switch Address Settings
R OTA RY S W I TC H A D D R E S S S E L E C T
Keypads and readers fitted to the system must be assigned a unique address on the LAN. Some keypads and readers include a rotary address switch for quick selection.
The following table shows how to set the address setting for each keypad and reader, as well as the number of devices the panel can support.
Rotary Switch Address Settings
Address Number Keypad/Reader N o
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
15
16
Table 8: Rotary Switch Address Settings
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
1
2
10
11
12
13
DIP Switch Address Settings
Keypad/Reader N o
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
6
7
4
5
S1
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
S2
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
S3
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
S4
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Figure 11: Rotary Swich Address Settings
2-7
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Installing the Hardware
E O L R E S I S TO R CO LO U R CO D E
3K3 =
Orange
6K8 =
Blue
EOL Resistor Colour Chart Figure 12:
Value
2K2
4K7
5K6
8K1
10K
12K
22K
Table 9:
Selected Resistor Colour Codes
Band 1 Band 2 Band 3
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
RED
VIOLET
BLUE
RED
RED
RED
GREY
BROWN
BROWN
RED
BROWN
BLACK
RED
RED
Band 4
BROWN
BROWN
BROWN
RED BROWN
ORANGE BROWN
ORANGE BROWN
ORANGE BROWN
EOL Resisstor Colour Codes
Because of variations in the colours used to mark resistors it is recommended that you use a multimeter to verify the value of resistors rather than rely on the colour code.
2-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
ZO N E W I R I N G
ZN 1
GND
ZN 2
N/C ZONE 1
N/C
ZONE 2
ZN 1
GND
ZN 2
Figure 13: N/C No EOL Zone
ALARM
N/C
N/C
ALARM
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
Figure 14: N/C Single EOL Zone
N/C
ALARM
ZN 1
GND
N/C
ALARM
ZN 2
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
ZONE 9
(6K8 EOL)
ZN 1
1
GND
ZN 2
2
Figure 15: N/C Split EOL Zone
N/C
TAMPER
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)
ALARM N/C
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
Figure 16: N/C Zone With Tamper
i
Note
The Above diagrams display the zone wiring
configurations using Normally-Closed Alarm contacts and Normally-Open Alarm Contacts. When
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 3
Wiring Diagrams
using Normally-Open Alarm Contacts you must select Inverted Seal for each zone in MENU 3-1-8.
A shorted loop is a tamper condition for all EOL zone configurations. .
ZN 1
GND
2
ZN 2
N/O ZONE 1
N/O
ZONE 2
Figure 17: N/O No EOL Zone
ALARM
N/O
ZN 1
GND
ZN 2
N/O
ALARM
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
Figure 18: N/O Single EOL Zone
N/O
ALARM
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
ZN 1
N/O
GND
ALARM
ZONE 9
(6K8 EOL)
ZN 2
ZN 1
GND
ZN 2
Figure 19: N/O Split EOL Zone
N/C
TAMPER
TAMPER
(6K8 EOL)
ALARM
N/O
ZONE 1
(3K3 EOL)
Figure 20: N/O Zone With Tamper
3-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Wiring Diagrams
E O L R E S I S TO R CO LO U R S A N D VA LU E S
Use either the 4 colour, or solid colour resistors supplied.
3K3 =
6K8 =
Orange
Blue
Figure 21: EOL Resistor Colour Chart
B OA R D CO N N E C TO R S
T he following table lists the various sockets, pin headers and switches located on the panel and their functions.
Connector
Service
Tamper
Default
Voice
Module
Serial
Telco
Relay
Table 10:
Description
This socket allow you to connect a service
Keypad to the panel during installation.
This socket is used to connect the panel enclosure tamper switch.
This push button is used to reset the control panel back to factory default.
This is used to connect the optional Voice
Command Module (CM101B).
This socket is used to connect serial devices to the control system like a Serial STU.
This is a RJ12 6P/4C connector that allows you to connect the control panel to the PSTN telephone line.
The relay select PIN’s allow you to easily program the relay common contact to switch either +12v or GND by fitting a plug on link.
Board Connector Descriptions
T E R M I N A L D E S C R I PT I O N S
Nº Name
1 Earth
Description
Earth wire from this terminal is connected to the Mains earth.
8
9
6
7
10
11
12
13
4
5
2
3
~ (AC)
~ (AC)
BAT (-)
BAT (+)
+12 V
+12 V
+12 V
GND
GND
GND
LAN +
LAN -
Connection of the AC plug pack transformer
Negative and positive connections to the stand-by battery. 12 VDC / 7AH
These terminals are used to power detectors and LAN devices up to 750 mA.
14
15
16
LAN A
LAN B
COMM+
These terminals are used to power LAN devices up to 750 mA.
Connect the LAN A data terminal of any LAN device (eg. Keypads, expansion boards) to this terminal. The control panel supports up to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG) wire on these terminals.
Connect the LAN B data terminal of any LAN device (eg. Keypads, expansion boards) to this terminal. The control panel supports up to 300 m of 24/0.20 (18 AWG) wire on these terminals.
Alarm power capable of providing a maximum of 2 Amp (+). This terminal is PTC
Fuse protected.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
N/C
COM
N/O
Programmable output, capable of providing a maximum of 500 mA (-). This terminal is
PTC Fuse protected.
2 A @ 24 VDC Relay Output - Form C contact
24 INPUT
Programmable Input for RF Receivers,
Keyswitch and other devices.
25 ZN 1
Zone 1 and 9 sensor loop input (+).
26 GND
Common (-) for Zone 1 and 2 sensor loop.
27 ZN 2
Zone 2 and 10 sensor loop input (+).
28 ZN 3
Zone 3 and 11 sensor loop input (+).
29 GND
Common (-) for Zone 3 and 4 sensor loop.
30 ZN 4
Zone 4 and 12 sensor loop input (+).
31 ZN 5
Zone 5 and 13 sensor loop input (+).
32 GND
Common (-) for Zone 5 and 6 sensor loop.
33 ZN 6
Zone 6 and 14 sensor loop input (+).
34 ZN 7
Zone 7 and 15 sensor loop input (+).
35 GND
Common (-) for Zone 7 and 8 sensor loop.
36 ZN 8
Zone 8 and 16 sensor loop input (+).
37
38
39
40
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
These terminals are used to connect the telephone line from the street.
These terminals are used to connect the premises telephones.
Table 11: Terminall Block Descriptions and Functions
3-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
L A N O V E R V I E W
The control panel communicates with other system module devices via the built in RS485 LAN or Local Area
Network.
For increased security, the system uses anti-substitution technology and a proprietary data encryption algorithm to communicate with all LAN modules.
When using the recommended cable types the LAN can be up to 1200 metres in length, or even greater when LAN isolators are used.
See the CM797B LAN Isolation Module reference guide for more information on how to use LAN isolators to increase the overall LAN length, improve surge immunity protection and prevent earth loops.
i
Note
It is recommended that one or more CM797 Isolators
be used when connecting the LAN between multiple buildings.
L A N W I R I N G
Figure 21 and Figure 22 show the two recommended module connection diagrams.
The method shown in Figure 21, is only recommended for use where the total LAN length is 300metres or less and the system is not installed in a electrically noisy environment.
In this case it is possible to use 7/0.20 or 14/0.20 security cable (non twisted) provided that module voltage levels are maintained within specification.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Wiring Diagrams
CONTROL PANEL
Connect to mains earth via 3 wire plug pack transformer.
EARTH
A
B
-
+
L
A
N
First Device
+ - A B
E
Y
LAN
TERM
Fit Shunt
N
CM704-ZONE EXPANDER
Security Cable
(7/0.20-14/0.20) cable can be used for this wiring configuration.
A
B
-
+
EARTH
L
A
N
+
-
A
B
Y
LAN
TERM
N
KEYPAD
The LOOP terminal is not internally connected.
It can be used to terminate the LAN+ on modules which have an on board power supply.
+
-
A
B
A
B
-
+
L
A
N
EARTH
Connect to mains earth via 3 wire plug pack transformer.
CM720-POWER SUPPLY
Positive LAN voltage is re-generated by the CM720
Power Supply.
LOOP
-
A
B
L
A
N
+12V OUT
Y
LAN
TERM
N
E
CM710-OUTPUT EXPANDER
The method shown in Figure 22, offers the greatest immunity to noise interference and voltage surges. This connection method is recommended where the total LAN length is greater than 300metres. When using twisted pair cable the LAN length can be up to 1200metres, and this can be extended even further when using LAN isolators.
- A B
A
B
-
+
EARTH
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
Fit Shunt
N
Last Device
The LAN can be wired using the daisy chain method as shown, where each module is wired back to the panel on the same cable run or using a star configuration, where individual modules are wired back to the panel on individual wires.
= +12V OUT
= EARTH
= LAN -
= LAN B
= LAN +
= LAN A
Un-shielded cable can be used successfully in many situations however for the highest reliability and performance in areas prone to frequent electrical storms or high levels of electrical interference, shielded twisted pair cable should be used.
Figure 22: LAN Connection Using 2 Pair Security Cable
Recommended for LAN Lengths 300 metres or less.
The LAN A and LAN B wires are not interchangeable.
Make sure that the LAN A wires from all modules connect to LAN A on the panel and LAN B wires from all modules connect to LAN B on the panel.
LAN+ and LAN- should not be used to power detectors or other external devices. These devices should be powered from the +12V terminals on the panel or via an external power supply.
When wiring modules with built in power supplies like
the control panel and the CM720B Power Supply, do NOT connect the EARTH wire from any 3 wire plug pack to the module’s EARTH input terminal, if you have installed a separate communication earth wire.
Do not connect the positives of two power supply sources together. When wiring the LAN to modules that are self powered, or powered from an external source you should terminate the LAN+ into the terminal marked LOOP. This terminal is simply a termination point and is not internally connected.
3-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Wiring Diagrams
Connect to main building earth conductor.
*
2.5mm
2
Yellow/Green
CONTROL PANEL
C. E. T.
EARTH
Shield only connected at one end.
A
B
-
+
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
Fit Shunt
N
First Device
Belden 8723
2 pair twisted shielded data cable is recommended for this wiring configuration.
+ - A B
E
CM704-ZONE EXPANDER
-
+
A
B
EARTH
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
N
+
-
A
B E
The LOOP terminal is not internally connected.
It can be used to terminate the LAN+ on modules which have an on board power supply.
+
-
A
B
E
KEYPAD
+
-
A
B
L
A
N
NOTE:
Do NOT connect plug pack
Earth wires to any modules when running a separate communication earth wire.
CM720-POWER SUPPLY
EARTH
Positive LAN voltage is re-generated by the CM720
Power Supply.
LOOP
-
A
L
A
N
B
+12V
OUT
Y
LAN
TERM
N
E
CM710-OUTPUT EXPANDER
Shield not connected at this end.
- A B
EARTH
+
-
A
B
L
A
N
Y
LAN
TERM
Fit Shunt
N
Last Device
= SHIELD
= EARTH
= LAN -
= LAN B
= LAN +
= LAN A
= RE-GENERATED LAN +
Figure 23: LAN Connection Using Twisted Pair Cable
Recommended for LAN Lengths greater than 300 metres.
The LAN- terminals from all modules must be connected together for correct operation.
S YS T E M E A R T H I N G
When running a CET communications Earth as per
Figure 24, the communication earth should be connected to the earth terminal on each module and then connected back through the CET to the main building earth conductor.
Do NOT connect the plug pack transformers earth wire to any modules earth terminal. i
Note
If a separate Communications Earth wire is installed,
Do NOT connect the EARTH wire from any 3 wire plug pack to any modules EARTH input terminal.
If a separate communications earth is NOT being used, then you should connect the earth wire from the 3 wire plug pack to the panels earth terminal as shown in Figure
22.
When using shielded cable, the shield of each length of cable should only be connected to a protective earth at one end. Do no allow the shield to make contact with negative 0 volts, ground or any other wiring within the system.
All earth wiring should be carried out in accordance with the local wiring regulations in your area.
T E R M I N AT I N G T H E L A N
For reliable operation the system LAN must be terminated correctly. The control panel and all LAN modules include a
LAN TERM pin header and shunt which is used to connect the termination resistor on the module.
When the shunt is installed between the Y pin and the centre pin, the terminator is fitted and when the shunt is between the N pin and the centre pin the terminator is not fitted.
Where all modules are connected to the panel on a single cable run, (Daisy Chained) the terminators should be installed on the first and last modules on the LAN.
If the modules are connected to the panel via multiple cables all running back to the control panel (Star
Configuration) then the terminators should be installed on the modules at the end of the two longest cable runs.
There are no LAN terminators on keypads. If a keypad is one of the two furthest devices from the control panel then a 470 ohm 1/2watt resistor can be fitted at the keypad between the LAN A and LAN B terminals.
In smaller installations where no LAN modules have been installed there is no need to fit the termination resistor on the control panel. i
Note
The LAN must be terminated correctly for proper
operation.
3-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Earth Connection
Spade For Surge
Protection
16-18 VAC
24VA
12VDC 7.2Ah Sealed
Lead Acid Battery
Panasonic LC-P127R2P or Equivalent
Accessory
12 VDC Supply
(750mA Fused)
The maximum continuous combined current draw from the +12V,
LAN + and
C+ terminals must not exceed 1 Amp
LAN Devices
Connection
Terminals
(750mA Fused)
Output Devices
12VDC Supply
(2.5A Fused)
Output 1, 2, 3 and 4
Connection Terminals
500mA
Ouput 5
Relay Output
24V D.C. 2Amp
RF Receiver
/ Keyswitch
Input
Zone Input
Terminals
Telephone Line
Connection Socket
(RJ12 6P4C)
Telephone Line
Connection
Terminals
Figure 24: Terminal Descriptions
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Wiring Diagrams
Relay COM
Terminal
Programming
Shunt
Panel Cabinet
Tamper Circuit
Connection
Terminals
Battery
Charging
Globe
RS485 LAN
Termination
Shunt
4-Pin Socket to LAN For
Service Keypad
Expansion Port
TCP/IP, GSM
Module
Connection
Default and
Direct Connect
Switch
Refer to
Documentation
For Dialer &
Status LED’s
10-Pin Serial
Connection
Socket For Direct
Link / Flash
Programming etc.
Voice Module
Connection
Socket
(Optional)
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
3-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Wiring Diagrams
16-18V AC
24 VA
Earth Connection
Spade For Surge Protection
Connect To
Cabinet Tamper
The maximum continuous combined current draw from the +12V,
LAN + and
C+ terminals must not exceed 1 Amp
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
Panasonic
LC-P127R2P or Equivalent
-
12V DC
7.2AH Sealed
Lead Acid Battery
NC
COM
-
Accessories
(e.g. PIR Detectors)
To Zone Terminals
Keypad /
LAN Expansion
Device
LAN +
LAN -
LAN A
LAN B
Strobe Light
Smoke
Detector
Fit the supplied
3K3 resistor across the piezo siren so the panel can monitor the connection.
+
+
Siren Tamper Switch
N/C
-
-
3K3
+
-
Piezo Siren
Ouput 5
Relay Output
24V D.C. 2Amp
RF DATA
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
N/C
N/C
RF
Receiver
Connect
To
Accessory
Power
+12V
GND
Connect To
Telephone Line
Mode 3
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE 5
ZONE 6
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
ZONE 7
ZONE 8
N/C
N/C
RJ12 6P4C - RJ12 6P4C
Phone Lead
Relay COM
Terminal
Programming
Shunt
Incoming Street
Telephone Line
Figure 25: Wiring Diagram
3-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 4
Programming Overview
T he control panel incorporates a menu text driven interface. This interface is very similar to that found on many mobile phones. Once programming mode is entered you will see a number of menu options in the display and these may vary depending in the user authority level.
E N T E R I N G P R O G R A M M I N G M O D E
To enter installer program mode, enter PIN + [MENU].
The default Installer PIN is 1234.
The Red and Green LED indicators on the keypad will flash to confirm Installer programming mode is active.
E X I T I N G P R O G R A M M I N G M O D E
Press and hold down the [MENU] key for 2 seconds.
The system will scan all timezones and peform the functions relative to the current system. For example if a timed output should be operated then it will operate and if the system should be armed it will arm.
i
Note
You can also select Exit and press [OK] from each
menu level.
CO M M A N D M E N U S
When you first enter programming mode, a special menu called the 'Command Menu' will appear at the top of the menu tree. The command menu provides a list of the most common system funtions like “Turn Chime Mode On”,
“Move To An Area” or “Turn An Area On”.
Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate and press
[OK] to select the command required.
P R O G R A M M I N G O P T I O N B I T M E N U S
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the 8 different options. To enable an option, press the [ON] key
– a tick will be displayed. To disable an option, press the
[OFF] key.
N AV I G AT I N G T H E M E N U S
Using the up and down arrow keys to navigate, locate the desired menu item using the highlight bar and then press the [OK] key to select.
A new list of menu items will appear. Repeat the above until the desired menu item is located.
To navigate backwards through the menu items press the [MENU] key at any time. Alternatively if you know the direct menu item number press [MENU] + Item Number.
Key
Scrolls Cursor Left
Description
Scrolls Cursor Right
OK
MENU
0 to 9
ON
OFF
Scrolls Cursor Up
Scrolls Cursor Down
Enter Menu Options or Saves Changes
Go Back One Level, Abort Current Change or
Hold Down to Exit Programming Mode
Enter Data Value
Turn On Bit Option
Turn Off Bit Option, Clear to End of Line
Table 12: Keys Used During Programming
L I S T O P T I O N S
Use the up and down arrow keys to step through the available options. Press [OK] to save or [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Zone Type Zn1
01 - Burglary Delay 1
Press
0-9, OK or MENU
You can also enter the option number directly
followed by [OK]. You must press the [OK] a second time to confirm the current setting.
Off On Low Battery
Show Overload
Report Overload
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
4-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
A L P H A T E X T
Text descriptions are available for Area Name, Zone Name,
User Name, TimeZone Name, Holiday Name, Keypad/
Reader Name and Output Name. Each name can have a maximum of 20 characters.
Area Name A2
T E L E P H O N E N U M B E R S
To program, select primary telephone number under
MENU 5-1-1 then enter the digits of the telephone number and press the [OK] key to save.
Use the up and down arrow keys to program special characters (•, # and Pause).
Destination 1 Phone 1
Reception Area
Press
◄►
OK or MENU
0297417000
Press
0-9 OK to SAVE
When programming text, each numeric key represents a different group of characters.
Pressing the same numeric key repeatedly will step you through the available characters assigned to the key. The text key layout is the same as most phones. Refer to the table below for detailed character information.
Key
3
4
1
2
.
A
D
G
Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
, ?
!
& ` 1
B C a b c 2
E F d e f
H I g h i
3
4
7
8
5
6
P
T
J
M
K L j k l 5
N O m n o 6
Q R S p q r
U V t u v 8 s 7
9
0
W X Y Z w x y z 9
SPACE 0
Scroll Up through entire character list
Scroll Down through entire character list
Move to left one character position
Move to right one character position
OFF
Clear from cursor postiion to end of line
Table 13: Text Keypad Character Set
Key Characters Assigned To Each Numeric Key
0 to 9
Enter the digits 0 to 9
Scroll Up through entire character list 0 - 9 • # , comma = 2 second pause
Move to left or right one character position
OFF
Clear from cursor position to end of line
Table 14: Phone Number Character Set
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
G E T T I N G S TA R T E D B AC K TO B A S E
The following steps are the mimimum requirements to get the system reporting back to base. Examples assume the panel is disarmed with no alarms and starting from the factory default settings.
Once the desired character is displayed press the right arrow key to move to the next character position.
To save programming changes, press [OK] or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
The following additional special characters are
available by scrolling using the up and down arrow keys.
+ - @ # $ “ & % * : ( ) / < > =
C LO C K P R O G R A M M I N G
Use the left and right arrow keys to move to the field and use the up and down keys to change. Press [OK] to save or
[MENU] to exit without saving.
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Set date and time.
MENU 7-1-0
3) Change default installer PIN.
MENU 1-5-2
4) Change default master PIN.
MENU 1-1-1
5) Enter (client) account number for Area 1.
MENU 2-2-0
6) Enter base station primary telephone number.
MENU 5-1-1
7) Enter base station secondary telephone number.
MENU 5-1-2
8) Press and hold down [MENU] to exit. i
Note
The time is set using a 24 hour clock.
Set Date And Time
01 -Jan-2015 12:00
Press
OK to SAVE
4-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
S E R V I C E M O D E
Service mode when activated disables dialler reporting, prevents all alarms and prevents all users from arming the system.
Turning Service Mode ON
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Turn service mode on.
[MENU] [7][0][8]
3) Follow display prompts.
4) Hold down [MENU] to exit. i
Note
Keypads will display the word “SERVICE” in the middle
of the display when service mode is active.
i
Note
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
You can disable factory defaulting using MENU 7-7-
4. If factory defaulting has been disabled you must know the installer PIN to perform a factory default otherwise the system will need to be returned to your supplier for defaulting or you can purchase a
CM255B Default Unlock Key which will unlock the panel in the field. Charges will apply for defaulting if returned to the distrubutor.
T R I G G E R I N G A D U R E S S A L A R M
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is off,
Enter, [2][5][8][0] + [8][0] + [OK] or [ON].
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is on,
Enter, [2][5][8][0] + [8][0] + [OFF].
i
Note
Duress alarms are triggered by entering the user PIN
followed by the last 2 digits of the user PIN followed by the ON or OFF key.
Turning Service Mode OFF
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Turn service mode on.
[MENU] [7][0][8]
3) Follow display prompts.
4) Hold down [MENU] to exit. i
Note
You must exit Service Mode to reactivate the system.
Service mode will automatically exit after 2 hours.
D O M E S T I C T E M P L AT E D E FAU LTS
The following table list the changes that will occur when you select domestic default. See MENU 7-0-3 — Domestic
Default.
Program Option
All Trouble Reports
All Bypass Reports
All Restore Reports
Domestic Default Value
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
D E FAU LT I N G T H E S YS T E M
Defaulting the system will reset all programming options back to the factory default setting. All programming information will be erased.
Hardware Default
1) Remove all power to the system - AC and battery.
2) Press and hold the default push button, then apply
power to the control panel.
3) Release the default button, The panel will reset and
revert to normal operation when default is complete.
Software Default
1) Enter programming mode.
[1][2][3][4] + [MENU]
2) Select factory default option.
MENU 7-0-4
3) The panel will reset and revert to normal operation
when the default is complete.
Destination 1 TX Format
Access Route
Open / Close Reports
Test Route
System Route
Domestic Reporting
Log Only
Log Only
Log Only
Log Only
Table 15: Domestic Reporting Defaults
D I R E C T L I N K P R O G R A M M I N G
The panel can be programmed via the Solution Link™
Upload/Download software in either Direct Link or
Remote Link modes. For Direct Link you will need a CM900
Direct Link module which is used to connect the panels serial port to the PC.
Once the cable is connected you will need to hold down the default switch on the panel for 5 seconds to initiate the programming session. See the board layout drawings in Section 3 of this manual for the default switch location.
i
Note
An optional CM255B Default Key may be purchased
to unlock both the Installer PIN and RAS Security
PIN. The default key is single use only. Refer to the
CM255B instructions for additional information.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
4-3
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
ZO N E A R R AY
The feature allows you to view the condition of all zones on the panel in banks of 16 zones at a time. From the installer programing mode press MENU 3-0-1 to access the zone array.
Use the [] and [] arrow keys to scroll up and down the zone banks and press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending on the current zone status.
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT--------
Press
OK or MENU
- = Outputs 05 to 08 and Outputs 11 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
D O O R A R R AY
This feature allows you to view door status in groups of 16.
From the installer programing mode press MENU 4-0-4 to access the door array.
Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending on the current door status.
L = Door Locked
U = Door Unlocked
O = Override
- = Disabled or Not Available
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
LLLLL---UUUUO---
Press OK or MENU
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
O U T P U T A R R AY
This feature allows you to view output status in groups of
16. From the installer programing mode press MENU 4-0-
2 to access the output array.
Use the [] and [] arrow keys to scroll up and down the output banks and press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
The following information can be displayed depending on the current zone status.
N = NORMAL - Off Condition
T = TRIGGERED - On Condition
F = FAULT - Overload Condition
- = DISABLED
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to select the output group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following output array information for outputs 1 to 16.
In the above example screen,
L = Doors 01 to 05 are Locked
O = Door 13 has a Override condition
U = Doors 09 to 12 area Unlocked
- = Doors 06 to 08 and Doors 14 to 16 are Disabled or
Not Available
T E S T I N G T H E S YS T E M
You will need to be in programming mode before accessing the test functions listed below.
Walk Test
Use the walk test command MENU 3-9-0 to test and verify that all zones work correctly.
External Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-0 to test and verify that all horn speakers operate. This test will sound the horn speaker for two seconds.
Internal Audible Test
Use MENU 4-9-1 to test and verify that all 12 VDC sirens operate. This test will sound the siren for two seconds.
Strobe Test
Use MENU 4-9-2 to test and verify that the strobe operates.
This test will turn on the strobe until you manually stop the test.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NNNNN---TF------
Press OK or MENU
Battery Test
Use MENU 7-9-1 to test the back-up battery that is connected to the control panel.
In the above example screen,
4-4
N = Outputs 01 to 05 are Normal (Off)
F = Output 10 has a Fault (Overload)
T = Output 09 is Triggered (On)
Communication Test
Use MENU 5-9-0 to test the telephone reporting capability of the control panel. You can also activate a communication test by holding down the Test / Mail key on the keypad.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
B A S I C R E P O R T I N G R E F E R E N C E
The following table is a shortform point ID listing.
For a complete listing of all the Contact ID and SIA event reporting information that will be sent by the control panel you will need to view the base station template document that is included on the Solution Link CD or contact your distributor.
Point ID Table
Ur999
Ur998
Ur997
Ur996
Ur001 - 995
Ur000
Module Description
Installer
Remote User
TimeZone
Guard Tour
Users
Quick Arm
Zn860
Zn861
Zn862
Zn863
Zn864
Zn870
Zn871
Zn872
Zn873
Zn881 - 888
Zn891 - 898
Zn911 - 918
Zn921 - 928
Zn901 - 908
Zn971 - 978
Zn901 - 908
Zn911 - 918
Zn921 - 928
Zn001 - 264
Zn001 - 064
Zn301 - 428
Zn429 - 556
Zn701 - 708
Zn711 - 718
Zn761 - 768
Zn771 - 778
Zn781 - 788
Zn791 - 798
Zn801 - 808
Zn811 - 818
Zn821 - 828
Zn831 - 838
Zn841 - 848
Zn851 - 858
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Zones General
Doors 1 - 64
User Keyfob 1-128
User Keyfob 129 - 256
Door Controller 1 - 8
Door Controller 9 - 16
Lift Controller 1 - 8
Lift Controller 9 - 16
Input Expander 1 - 8
Input Expander 9 - 16
Universal Expander 1 - 8
Universal Expander 9 - 16
RF Receiver 1 - 8
LAN Power Supply 1 - 8
Serial Expander 1 - 8
Output Expander 1 - 8
GSM Module
GSM Input 1
GSM Input 2
GSM Input 3
GSM Input 4
Ethernet Module
Real Time Clock Module
Voice Module
Service Keypad
Consoles 1 - 8
Control Panel 1 - 8
LAN Isolator 1 - 8
LAN Isolator 9 - 16
Destination Route 1 - 8
Consoles 9 - 16
Destination Route 1 - 8
LAN Isolator 1 - 8
LAN Isolator 9 - 16
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
Zn931 - 938
Zn951 - 958
Zn971 - 978
LAN Power Supply 9 - 16
Output Expander 9 - 16
Consoles 9 - 16
Table 16: Shortform Point ID Listing
4-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
DT M F CO N T R O L F U N C T I O N S
Firmware includes comprehensive DTMF control of individual areas and outputs with full user PIN and TIMER
GROUP access verification.
DTMF EXAMPLES
Each example below shows the log on step for clarity. In practise is only necessary to log on once per DTMF control session.
Unlike other systems, no additional hardware or modules are required for DTMF control. To configure the desired functions see MENU 5-3-5 DTMF Options.
How to Use DTMF Control
1) Once the panel answers the incoming call, if either
option 1, 2, 3 or 4 in MENU 5-3-5 is enabled, then the panel will play a short welcome jingle. You now have approximately 5 seconds to enter a valid PIN and log onto the panel.
2) Enter PIN followed by the [#] key. If the PIN is valid
the system will respond with two short beeps. If the
PIN is invalid then a single long beep will be heard.
If a valid PIN is not entered in time, the panel will attempt to establish a modem connection as if connecting to the
Solution Link software.
If this happens you will need to hang up for approximately
60 seconds before trying again.
3) Once validated, the following commands can be
performed. See the table below. If no keys are pressed for 20 seconds then the panel will play the exit jingle before terminating the session and hanging up. Pressing [#][#] at any time while connected will cause the panel to terminate the session.
To turn Area 1 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#]
[1] + [1] + [#] + [1]
= Log ON
= Arm Area 1
To turn Output 10 ON enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[2] + [1] [0] + [#] + [1]
= Turn Output 10 ON
To turn Output 12 OFF enter the following
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#]
= Log ON
[2] + [1] [2] + [#] + [2] = Turn Output 12 OFF i
Note
If the DTMF Quick Arm option is enabled
then it is possible to remotely arm all areas without logging onto the panel.
Simply enter [0] + [#] following the welcome jingle.
Make sure that the phone being used to remotely control the panel is set to transmit DTMF tones when keys are pressed during the call. This option is disabled by default on some phones.
DTMF CONTROL FUNC TIONS
Operation
Quick Arm
All Areas
Command
[0] + [#]
Tone
Response
High,
Medium,
Low
Log In
OK
Error
Turn Area
ON
Turn Area
OFF
Turn Output
ON
Turn Output
OFF
[PIN] + [#]
Incorrect Entry
[1] + [Area N o
] + [#] + [1]
Low, High
Long Beep
Low, High
[1] + [Area N o ] + [#] + [2] + [#] High, Low
[2] + [Output N o ] + [#] + [1] + [#] Low, High
[2] + [Output N o
] + [#] + [2] + [#] High, Low
End
Session
[#] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Table 17: DTMF Remote Control Functions
4-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
M E N U R E F E R E N C E TA B L E
The control panel includes a simple text menu system which makes all levels of programming extremely easy. Once a valid PIN has been entered followed by the MENU key, the system will automatically determine which menus and options the PIN holder has access to and only those items will be displayed.
There are four basic grouping levels used. Throughout the manual, symbols have been placed near each menu option so that you can easily relate the authority level which is required to access them.
A =
= All (No PIN Required)
U =
= User PIN Has Access
M =
= Master PIN Has Access
I =
= Installer PIN Has Access
The following table lists all programming menus and the authority level required to access them.
0 Commands
UMI 2-0-1 Turn Area On/Off
UMI 2-0-2 Turn All Areas On
UMI 2-0-3 Turn All Areas Off
UMI 2-0-4 Move To Area
AUMI 2-0-5 Chime On/Off
UMI 1-1-0 Change Own PIN
AUMI 3-0-0 Zone Status
AUMI 4-0-0 Output Status
UMI 4-0-1 Turn Output On/Off
MI
7-1-0 Set Date And Time
UMI 3-0-5 Smoke Sensor Reset
UMI 3-9-0 Walk Test All Zones
MI
4-9-0 External Siren Test
MI
4-9-1 Internal Siren Test
MI
4-9-2 Strobe Test
UMI 5-0-1 Call/Answer RAS
UMI 7-9-1 Battery Test
UMI 5-9-0 Test Dialler
I
7-0-8 Service Mode
UMI
About
1 Access
1-0 Commands
MI
1-0-0 Erase User
1-1 PIN Codes
UMI 1-1-0 Change Own PIN
MI
1-1-1 Change Other PIN
MI
1-1-2 Add PIN
MI
1-1-3 Delete PIN
I
1-1-4 View PIN
1-2 Token
MI
1-2-0 Add Token
MI
1-2-1 Delete Token
MI
1-2-2 Token Status
MI
1-2-3 Edit Token
1-3 RF Keyfob
MI
1-3-0 Add Keyfob
MI
1-3-1 Delete Keyfob
I
1-3-2 Test Keyfob
1-4 User Properties
MI
1-4-0 User Name
MI
1-4-1 Area Assignment
MI
1-4-2 User Options
MI
1-4-4 TimeZone Access
MI
1-4-5 Door Assignment
MI
1-4-6 User Expire Date
1-5 Global Properties
I
1-5-0 PIN Length
I
1-5-1 PIN Retry Count
I
1-5-2 Installer PIN
1-6 Reporting
I
1-6-0 Access Route
I
1-6-1 Access Options
1-8 Fingerprint
MI
1-8-0 Add Fingerprint
MI
1-8-1 Delete Fingerprint
MI
1-8-2 Fingerprint Status
2 Areas
2-0 Commands
AUMI 2-0-0 Area Status
UMI 2-0-1 Turn Area On/Off
UMI 2-0-2 Turn All Areas On
UMI 2-0-3 Turn All Areas Off
UMI 2-0-4 Move To Area
AUMI 2-0-5 Chime On/Off
MI
2-0-6 Chime Mode
2-1 Area Properties
MI
2-1-0 Area Name
I
2-1-1 General Options
I
2-1-2 Input Options
I
2-1-3 Output Options
I
2-1-4 Reporting Options
I
2-1-5 Strobe Trigger
MI
2-1-6 Part Mode 1 Name
MI
2-1-7 Part Mode 2 Name
MI
2-1-8 Auto Arming
2-2 Reporting
I
2-2-0 Account Dest 1
I
2-2-1 Account Dest 2
I
2-2-2 Open Close Route
2-8 Timers
MI
2-8-0 Exit Time
MI
2-8-1 Entry Time 1
MI
2-8-2 Entry Time 2
MI
2-8-3 Part Entry Time
I
2-8-4 Auto Arm Pre Alert
I
2-8-6 Senior Watch Time
2-9 Area Testing
I
2-9-0 Area Watch
I
2-9-1 User Test Interval
I
2-9-2 Service Interval
I
2-9-3 Test Options
Table 18: Menu Reference Table
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
4-7
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
3 Inputs 4 Outputs 5 Comms
3-0 Commands
AUMI 3-0-0 Zone Status
MI
3-0-1 Zone Array
UMI 3-0-2 Bypass Zones
MI
MI
3-0-3 Set Chime Zones
3-0-4 Set Part 2 Zones
UMI 3-0-5 Smoke Sensor Reset
3-1 Zone Properties
MI
3-1-0 Zone Name
I
3-1-1 Zone Type
I
3-1-2 Area Assignment
I
3-1-3 Pulse Count
I
3-1-4 Pulse Count Time
I
3-1-5 Door Assignment
I
3-1-6 Report Route
I
3-1-7 Report Options
I
3-1-8 Zone Options
I
I
3-5
3-5-0 Input Type
3-6
PGM Input
Tamper Inputs
3-6-0 Tamper Options
4-0 Commands
AUMI 4-0-0 Output Status
5-0 Commands
UMI 5-0-1 Call /Answer RAS
UMI
4-0-1 Turn Output On/Off
MI
5-0-2 Call Forward On/Off
MI
4-0-2 Output Array
MI
4-0-3 Door Status
MI
4-0-4 Door Array
MI
4-0-5 Door Control
MI
4-1-0 Output Name
I
I
I
I
I
4-1 Properties
4-1-1 Event Type
4-1-2 Event Assignment
4-1-3 Output Polarity
4-1-4 Time Parameter
4-1-5 Output Options
4-2 Door Properties
MI
4-2-0 Door Name
I
I
4-2-2 Unlock TimeZone
4-2-3 Door Options
I
I
I
3-3 RF Zone
I
3-3-0 Add RF Device
3-3-1 Delete RF Device
3-3-2 Test RF Device
3-4-0 EOL Value
I
3-4-1 Keyswitch Options
I
3-4-2 Input Options
4-9 Output Testing
MI
4-9-0 External Siren Test
MI
4-9-1 Internal Siren Test
3-4 Global Input Options MI
4-9-2 Strobe Test
MI
4-9-3 Fire Siren Test
MI
5-0-3 Check Web Email
MI
5-0-4 Email System Log
MI
5-0-5 Start Direct Link
MI
5-0-6 Voice Setup
MI
5-0-8 Register Customer
I
5-0-9 Register Installer
I
MI
MI
MI
5-1 Telephone Numbers
5-1-0 Number Prefix
5-1-1 Destination 1
5-1-2 Destination 2
5-1-6 Call Forward On
MI
5-1-7 Call Forward Off
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-2
5-2-0 Call Attempt Count
5-2-1 Dialler Options
5-2-2 Phone Line Options
5-2-3 Country
5-2-7 Set SMS Password
5-3
Properties
Remote Access
5-3-0 Call Back Number
5-3-1 RAS Security PIN
5-3-2 Log Threshold
I
5-3-3 Ring Count
I
5-3-4 RAS Options
I
5-3-5 DTMF Options
I
5-3-6 Voice Access Code
I
5-3-7 CLI Numbers
IM
5-3-8 User RAS PIN
3-9 Input Testing
UMI 3-9-0 Walk Test All Zones
UMI 3-9-1 Walk Test A Zone
I
3-9-2 Sensor Watch Time
5-4 Reporting
I
5-4-0 TX Format Dest 1
I
5-4-1 TX Format Dest 2
I
5-4-2 Test Route
I
5-4-3 System Route
I
5-4-4 Emergency Route
I
5-4-5 Swinger Dialler
I
5-4-6 Burg Report Delay
I
5-4-7 Fire Report Delay
5-5 MyAlarm
I
5-5-0 IP Address
I
5-5-1 IP Port
I
5-5-2 MyAlarm Options
I
5-5-7 Gateway Numbers
MI
5-5-8 Email Address
MI
5-5-9 Email Options
4-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
5-6 IP Reporting
I
5-6-0 Receiver IP
I
5-6-1 Receiver Port
I
5-6-2 Poll Rate
I
5-6-3 ACK Wait Time
I
5-6-4 IP Format
I
5-6-5 Retry Count
I
5-6-6 Encryption Key
I
5-6-7 Conettix NNC
I
5-6-8 SIA IP Prefix
I
5-6-9 User Name/Password
5-7 IP Remote Access
MI
5-7-0 IP Address
MI
5-7-1 IP Port
I
5-7-2 IP RAS Options
I
5-7-3 RAS Lockout Time
I
5-7-5 IPRS Address
I
5-7-6 IPRS Port
5-9 Comms Test
UMI 5-9-0 Send Test Report
I
5-9-1 Test Report Time
I
5-9-2 Test Report Period
I
5-9-3 Test Report Options
I
5-9-4 Test Route
I
5-9-5 Dial Number Test
6 Devices
6-0 Commands
UMI
6-0-0 Device Status
I
I
6-0-1 LAN Secure
6-0-2 LAN Scan
I
6-0-3 LAN Watch
MI
6-0-7 Keypad Volume
MI
6-0-8 Keypad Contrast
MI
6-0-9 Keypad Backlight
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-1 Keypads & Readers
MI
6-1-0 Name
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-1-2 Area Options
6-1-3 Home Area
6-1-4 General Options
6-1-5 Indicator Options
6-1-6 Emergency Keys
6-1-7 Door Assignment
I
6-1-8 Lockout Time
MI
6-1-9 WiFi Settings
6-2 RF Devices
6-2-0 Receiver Options
6-2-1 Supervision Time
6-2-2 RF Device Options
6-2-3 Add RF Keypad
6-2-4 Delete RF Keypad
6-2-5 View RF Device ID
6-3 Serial Device
6-3-0 Device Type
6-3-1 Baud Rate
6-3-2 Flow Control
I
I
I
I
I
6-5 GSM/GPRS
MI
6-5-0 GSM/GPRS Status
I
6-5-1 GSM/GPRS Options
MI
6-5-5 CLI Triggers
MI
6-5-6 SMS Control
I
I
I
6-5-7 APN Server Name
6-5-8 APN Username
6-5-9 APN Password
6-6 Ethernet Module
6-6-0 Module IP Address
6-6-1 Subnet Mask
6-6-2 Default Gateway
6-6-3 Module MAC Address
6-6-9 Ethernet Options
7 System
7-0 Commands
UMI 7-0-0 Panel Status
UMI 7-0-1 System Trouble
UMI 7-0-2 History Log
I
7-0-3 Domestic Default
I
7-0-4 Factory Default
I
7-0-5 Template Default
MI
7-0-6 TimeZone Array
I
7-0-8 Service Mode
7-1 Clock
MI
7-1-0 Set Date And Time
I
7-1-1 Summertime On
I
7-1-2 Summertime Off
I
7-1-3 Locale
7-3 Power
I
7-3-0 AC Options
I
7-3-1 Battery Options
I
7-3-2 Fuse Options
7-4 Siren
I
7-4-0 Tone
I
7-4-1 Speed
MI
7-4-2 Volume
I
7-4-3 Siren Swinger
7-5 TimeZones
MI
7-5-0 Name
MI
7-5-1 Time
MI
7-5-2 Day
MI
7-5-3 TimeZone Options
7-6 Holidays
MI
7-6-0 Holiday Name
MI
7-6-1 Start Stop Dates
7-7 System Options
I
7-7-0 General Options
I
7-7-1 Area Options
I
7-7-2 Keypad Idle Screen
MI
7-7-3 Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
I
7-7-4 Installer Options
I
7-7-5 Language
MI
7-7-7 Site Name
7-9 System Testing
UMI 7-9-0 Walk Test All Zones
UMI 7-9-1 Battery Test
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
4-9
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
B A S I C S YS T E M O P E R AT I O N
T U R N I N G A N A R E A A L L O N
Use this function to turn an area All On. The control panel is factory default only for one area. As soon as you turn an area on, exit time will start. Exit time allows you to exit the premises without sounding an alarm. The security installer or a master PIN user can program the length of exit delay time.
T U R N I N G A N A R E A O F F
When the system is on, you must enter through a designated entry door to prevent an alarm. Opening a designated door (e.g. front door) will start entry time.
During entry time, the keypad will sound the Hi/Lo tone to remind you to turn the area off. To turn the area off, enter your PIN followed by the [OFF] key before the entry delay time expires.
1) Make sure that all zones are normal (not faulted).
2) Enter your PIN, then press the [ON] key. If your PIN is valid and if all zones are normal, exit delay time will start. You should leave now. If your control panel detects a faulted zone, you should return it to normal, or bypass the zone. During exit delay, you may stop the area from turning on by entering your
PIN followed by the [OFF] key.
If you enter through the wrong door or fail to turn the system off before the entry delay time expires, you may sound an alarm. If an alarm occurs, silence the alarm
(by entering your PIN followed by the [OFF] key) and call your security company to let them know that it is not an emergency situation.
T U R N I N G A N A R E A PA R T O N / PA R T 2 O N
Use this function to turn an area Part On or Part 2 On. The control panel is factory default only for one area. Part On and Part 2 On turns on only part of the area, leaving the rest of the area turned off.
Only the security company can program which zones are monitored for Part On. A master user can program which zones are monitored when a user turns an area Part 2 On.
Once you have turned an area Part On or Part 2 On, exit delay time starts to count down. You should leave all zones that are active before exit delay time expires.
Leaving active zones after exit delay expires causes an alarm event. Use Part On or Part 2 On only when you want part of an area turned on.
1) Enter your PIN + [OFF] to turn the system (or area)
off. The keypad will no longer display the ‘Lock’ or
‘Part’ icons.
S I L E N C I N G A L A R M S
When the control panel has registered an alarm, the keypad (s) and sirens will sound to alert personnel that an alarm occurred. The keypad will scroll all alarms on the keypad display for visual feedback. If you enter your PIN before the system dials your security company, the alarm report is cancelled (if programmed).
1) Enter your PIN + [OFF] to silence any alarm and turn
the system off. The keypad will continue to scroll all alarm events that caused the alarm. This is called alarm memory.
2) To clear alarm memory, turn the area on and off
again (eg. PIN + [ON] + PIN + [OFF]).
1) Make sure that all zones are normal (not faulted).
2) Enter your PIN, then press the [PART] key. If your
PIN is valid and if all zones are normal, the keypad will prompt you to select Part On or Part 2 On.
3) Using the arrow keys, highlight Part On or Part 2
On then press [OK]. Exit delay time will start. You should leave now. If your system has a faulted zone, you should return it to normal, or bypass the faulted zone. During exit delay, you may stop the system from turning Part On by entering your PIN followed by the [OFF] key.
4) When exit time has expired, the keypad will display
the Part On icon.
i
Note
If you wish to cancel the exit delay time when turning
the area Part On/Part 2 On, press the [PART] key once during the exit delay time.
AU TO M AT I C A R M I N G
Your system may have been programmed to automatically turn one or more areas All On at a certain time of the day.
If for some reason you are still in the building when the auto arming is taking place, it is possible to delay the auto-on time (automatic arming time) by one hour simply by entering your PIN during the auto-on pre-alert time.
The auto-on pre-alert time sounds the keypad buzzer to warn you that the system will automatically turn All On.
Example:
If the control panel is programmed by your installer to automatically turn All On at 6:00pm and the auto-on prealert time starts beeping the keypad at 5:55pm, entering your PIN between 5:55pm and 6:00pm will delay the autoon time by one hour and the auto-on pre-alert time will again commence at 6:55pm. Therefore the system will automatically turn All On at 7:00pm.
4-10 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
R E M OT E A R M I N G - Q U I C K A R M
If you forget to turn your system on, it may be possible for you to remotely turn on your system using a touch tone telephone if the remote arm option has been enabled by your installer.
To remotely turn on your system, call the telephone number that the control panel is connected to. When the control panel answers the call, you will here 3 beeps in accending frequency if the control panel is disarmed. To turn on your control panel, press [0] + [#] on your touch tone telephone. You will hear 3 beeps in decending order when the panel arms.
All areas on the system will be turned All On regardless of there condition when using the DTMF quick arm function.
D U R E S S O R S I L E N T A L A R M S
A duress emergency alarm can be easily initiated via the keypad if you are being forced to operate the system against your will.
To initiate a duress emergency, enter your normal user PIN followed by the last 2 digits of your PIN followed by the
ON or OFF key. See the following examples.
1) If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when
the area is off, enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OK] or
[ON].
2) If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when
the area is on, enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OFF].
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
4-11
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Overview
This page left intentionally blank
4-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 5
Access Programming
T he control panel has a total of 255 users that can operate the system using a PIN, token, RF Keyfob or fingerprint. A maximum of 16 LAN devices which comprise of keypads that have built-in prox readers, LAN readers and fingerprint readers can be used to operate the system.
Each user name can have up to 20 characters to identify the user within the system and to present a greeting message when operating the system. User PIN’s can be configured for 1 to 8 digits or variable where users can have different pin lengths up to 8 digits long. All users have options which can be set to control their authority level within the system, whether they are allowed to bypass zones or send
'open' and 'close' reports see MENU 1-4-2 — User Options.
The installer Ur999 is a special user within the system and has ultimate privileges which can not be changed. The
Installer PIN can arm or disarm the system and has access to all menus at all times. This is a very powerful user pin and should be treated with utmost respect so that it is not widely known.
TimeZone Access
Users can belong to a timezone that determines whether or not the user is allowed access to the system. To create a timezone, you will need to setup a timezone with start and stop times, including the days of the week and then set the user to follow that timezone. Each user that you require to be restricted is then assigned to the timezone you selected.
Each timezone have up to 4 different start/stop periods that can be used to create multiple access times and holidays can also be linked with timezones.
Example:
Restricting access to only Monday to Friday 8am to
10pm.
1) Pick a timezone access number between 2-16, lets
say 5.
2) Setup timezone 5 start time 8am, stop time 10pm,
days MTWTF.
3) Assign each restricted user to timezone access 5.
TimeZones
Timezones determine the valid operating times and days and then users which are to be restricted are then assigned to the timezone.
Door Assignment
A user can be restricted to certain doors within a building and this is done by assigning the user to one or more doors. When a user presents their token to a proximity reader, the user parameters are checked and if the user has a matching door assignment to the reader door assignment, then access is granted.
The output used to operate the door strike will also need to be assigned to the same door number so that it operates at the same time. To restrict a user from accessing doors outside specified times, create a timezone and assign the user timezone to the same timezone.
Example:
Prox reader operating a door.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door 1 to 16, say 4.
2) Set an output event type = door and Index = 4.
3) Assign user to door 4, a user can belong to multiple
doors.
4) Assign reader to area 0 and disable arm/disarm
options.
5) Present token to reader to access door.
Example:
Prox reader operating door and disarm Area 1.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door 1-16, say 4.
2) Set an output event type = door and index = 4.
3) Assign user to door assignment 4, a user can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign reader to area 1, enable disarming option.
5) Present token to reader to disarm, present token
again to release door.
5-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Example:
Prox reader operating door and arm/disarm Area 1.
1) Assign proximity reader 9 to a door assignment 1 -
16, say 4.
2) Set an output event type = door and index = 4.
3) Assign user to door 4, a user can belong to multiple
doors.
4) Assign reader to area 1, enable arming/disarming
and badging options.
5) Present token to disarm, present token to release
door, present token 3 times to arm Area 1.
U S E R D E FAU LT TA B L E
Parameter
Add PIN
Name
Area Assignment
User Options
Master User
Reserved
Arm Only
Can Bypass
Auto Bypass Allowed
Always Report Op/Cl
Reserved
Log Credential
TimeZone Access
Door Assignment
User 1
2580
User 1
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
User 2 - 255
User 2 - 255
1
Y
Y
Y
Table 19: User Default Programming Options
U S E R P I N S
At factory default, each PIN is set to 4 digits in length.
The default PIN for User 1 (master user) is 2580. Only the installer can change the PIN length - see MENU 1-5-0 —
PIN Length.
Access > Commands >
Erase User
-
MENU 1-0-0
This menu allows the installer or master user, to erase another user. When a user is erased, it will return back to factory default all information relating to the following:
PIN
Token ID
RF Keyfob ID
Fingerprint ID
Name
TimeZone Access
Door Assignment
Area Assignment
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [0] + [0].
2) Use the arrow keys to highlight the user to be
erased then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
3) Verify the user name to be erased and press [OK].
To abort press [MENU].
To erase Ur1
John Smith press OK.
Press OK or MENU
5-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Access > PIN Codes >
Change Own PIN
-
-
MENU 1-1-0
This menu allows a user to change their own PIN. The new
PIN should have the same number of digits as the old PIN, unless the installer has programmed the PIN length as variable. See MENU 1-5-0 - PIN length.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter a new PIN.
Enter New PIN For Ur2
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error
message ‘PIN Not Allowed’ is displayed, press [OK] and try a different PIN.
i
Note
Enter PIN For Ur3
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
If you attempt to enter a new PIN that has already
been programmed for another user, the system will display ‘PIN Not Allowed’. The next time the original PIN holder disarms the system they will be notified that their PIN has been compromised.
The compromised PIN message will continue to be displayed until one of the users that have the same
PIN changes their PIN to be different.
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK]. If the error
message ‘PIN Not Allowed’ is displayed, press [OK] and try a different PIN.
3) The keypad will now prompt you to confirm the
new PIN again.
Confirm New PIN Ur2
Debbie Smith
••••
Press OK or MENU
i
Note
If you attempt to enter a new PIN that has already
been programmed for another user, the system will display ‘PIN Not Allowed’. The next time the original PIN holder disarms the system they will be notified that their PIN has been compromised.
The compromised PIN message will continue to be displayed until one of the users that have the same
PIN changes their PIN to be different.
Access > PIN Codes >
Change Other PIN
-
MENU 1-1-1
This menu allows the Installer or master user to change the PIN of other user’s. The master user can only change
PINs for other users in the same area.
The new PIN should have the same number of digits as the old PIN, unless the installer has programmed the PIN length as variable. See MENU 1-5-0 - PIN length.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list users that can be changed.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
5-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > PIN Codes >
Add PIN
-
MENU 1-1-2
This menu allows the installer or master users the ability to add a PIN to another user. A master user can only add a
PIN for users that have been assigned to the same area(s).
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list users that can be added.
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Ur4 User 4 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) Enter the new PIN, then press [OK] to save.
Access > PIN Codes >
View PIN
MENU 1-1-4
This menu allows the installer to view and verify the PIN for any user.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list, then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) The keypad will display the current PIN of the user
selected.
View PIN Ur1
Enter New PIN For Ur2
Debbie Smith
2580
Press OK to SAVE
Press OK or MENU
Access > PIN Codes >
Delete PIN
-
MENU 1-1-3
This menu allows the installer or master users the ability to delete another users PIN. A master user can only delete a
PIN for users that have been assigned to the same area(s).
The installer and master user cannot delete their own PIN.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list users that can be deleted.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
U S E R TO K E N S
This section outlines how to add and delete tokens. Users
1 to 255 can have a token assigned. Tokens provide an alternate method for users to turn the system on and off or to operate a door strike.
A token is a plastic card that has a unique ID number. Each user can be assigned a PIN as well as a token for greater flexibility.
A token can be presented to a keypad with a built in reader or to an external LAN reader module to operate the system. Tokens will follow all user settings.
2) Press [OK] to delete the PIN or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Press OK To Delete PIN
For Ur2
Debbie Smith
Press OK or MENU
Access > Token >
Add Token
-
MENU 1-2-0
This menu allows the installer or master user to assign a token ID to each user. Only one token can be assigned to each user. To change a token for an existing user you will need to first delete the old token before you add the new one. See MENU 1-2-1 — Delete Token
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that dont already have tokens assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
5-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
2) Swipe the token card past the reader. As you swipe
the token, the reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the token has been learnt.
To add token for Ur1
John Smith present new token
Press OK or MENU
i
Note
If the Add Token command is initiated from a keypad
that does not have a built in reader, you will need to select a reader from the list before proceeding. Swipe the Token at the selected reader.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > Token >
Token Status
-
MENU 1-2-2
This menu allows the installer or master user to identify which user a token has been assigned to. You will need to have the token in order to do the test. This menu can only be performed at a prox keypad.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
prompt you to swipe the token to be checked.
Present Token to be
Identified
Press OK or MENU
i
Note
In previous versions, systems configured to use a
CM796B Wiegand to RS485 LAN Interface Module with a PR100B Proximity Reader would successfully allow the user to learn tokens via the PR100B however presenting the same token to other compatible
LAN or keypads readers on the system would fail to operate.
2) Present the token to the keypad, you will hear a
confirmation beep and the display will show the token status.
Token belongs to Ur2
Debbie Smith
In version 2.14, this has been corrected so that tokens added via the PR100B Proximity Reader can now be used across all compatible proximity readers.
Press OK or MENU
3) To exit, press [OK] or [MENU]. i
Note
In previous versions, when adding consecutive tokens
via the reader, the system would always display the first user that doesn't already have a token assigned rather than the next user in sequence.
Access > Token >
Edit Token
-
MENU 1-2-3
This menu allows the installer or master user to view or change the token ID for any user.
In version 2.15, when adding consecutive tokens, after adding user x, the keypad will now return to user x + 1.
Access > Token >
Delete Token
-
MENU 1-2-1
This menu allows the installer or master user to delete an existing user’s token ID.
1) Press [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list, then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [2] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The keypad will only display users that have tokens assigned to them.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) The keypad will display the current token ID of the
user selected.
Edit Token Ur1
0000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Press [OK] to delete the token or press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Press OK to Delete Token
For Ur1
John Smith
Press OK or MENU
5-5
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
R F K E YF O B S
This section outlines how to add and delete RF keyfobs.
RF keyfobs provide an alternate method for users to turn the system on and off. Each user can have one RF keyfob assigned.
The RF keyfob must be compatible with the RF Receiver that has been programmed in MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
Refer to MENU 6-2-2 — RF Device Options to configure the following preferences for RF keyfobs.
Audible RF Keyfob Panic,
Report RF Keyfob Panic and
RF Keyfob ‘Part On’ Arming Allowed.
RF keyfobs will follow all user settings.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 Mary Smith
Press
OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to delete the RF Keyfob ID number and
exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Press OK To Delete
Keyfob For Ur1
009553507
Press OK or MENU
.
Access > RF Keyfob >
Test Keyfob
MENU 1-3-2
Access > RF Keyfob >
Add Keyfob
-
MENU 1-3-0
This menu allows the installer or a master user to assign an
RF keyfob to a user.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that dont already have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
This menu allows the installer to test the RF keyfob operation. Key the transmitter a number of times and the display will show the number of transmissions received and a signal level of Good, Poor, Relocate or Average.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that have an RF Keyfob assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) Enter the RF Keyfob ID number, or transmit the
keyfob ID by pressing a button on the keyfob.
Enter Keyfob ID Ur2
Debbie Smith
000000000
Press OK or MENU
-
MENU 1-3-1
2) Press any key on the transmitter you wish to test.
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Waiting for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
If the system receives the signal the following screen will appear.
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Transmissions = 001
Signal = Average
Press OK or MENU
Access > RF Keyfob >
Delete Keyfob
This menu allows the installer or a master user to delete an
RF Keyfob ID that has been assigned to a user.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [3] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The keypad will only list users that have an RF Keyfob assigned.
3) Repeat step 2 as required and then press [OK] to
exit.
5-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
U S E R P R O P E R T I E S
This section outlines user properties including User Name,
Area Assignment, User Options, TimeZone Access, Door
Assignment, and Expire Date.
Access > User Properties >
User Name
-
MENU 1-4-0
U s e r 1 N a m e
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming operate Area 1.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
This menu allows the installer or a master user to program the user’s name (max of 20 characters). This name is used for system greetings, reporting and log entries to identify the user by name.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK].
Ur1 User 1 Name
Ur2 User 2 Name
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Security System
Area 2 Name
Area 3 Name
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until you have assigned the user to
all required areas, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the user name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
User Name Ur1
i
Note
User 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
i
Note
In version 2.17 (only), token users that belong to
more than one area turned the home area upon presenting their token at keypads that have a built in reader.
In version 2.19, this has been corrected so that multi area token users can log onto the system when they first present their token at a keypad with a built in reader. This allows the token user to select which area to turn All On or off, or alternatively press and hold the [All On] or [OFF] keys to turn all areas they belong to All On or all areas they belong to off.
i
Note
In previous versions, there was no support for arming
and/or disarming all user areas when operating the system via an external metal keypad.
Access > User Properties >
Area Assignment
1 Security System
2 Area 2 Name
3 Area 3 Name
4 Area 4 Name
5 Area 5 Name
6 Area 6 Name
7 Area 7 Name
8 Area 8 Name
-
MENU 1-4-1
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
In version 2.19, user's can now enter their PIN, then press and hold the [#] key to turn all areas they belong to at the same time, or enter their PIN and press the
[*] key to turn off all areas they belong to at the same time.
This menu allows the installer or master user to program which areas (1 to 8) other users can access. Each user can be assigned to one or multiple areas.
The master user can only assign other users to any one or multiple areas that the master user itself has been assigned to. At factory default, each user is assigned to
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
5-7
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
User Options
1 Master User
2 Reserved
3 Arm Only
4 Can Bypass
5 Auto Bypass Allowed
6 Always Report Op/Cl
7 Reserved
8 Log Credential
-
MENU 1-4-2
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Always Report Op/Cl
Setting this option will cause the system to send opening and closing reports when the user arms and disarms an area.
i
Note
A user not set for 'Open' and 'Close' reports will only send a closing report when the reporting format is set to Contact ID or SIA formats (PSTN or GSM) when an 'Open' report is previously sent.
SMS and other reporting formats will only send open and close reports if the user is programmed to send them.
The above options can only be programmed by the installer and are programmable per user.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [2] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Master User
Reserved
Arm Only
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
Log Credential
This option is user specific allowing guards who attend the site to be given a unique credential. When the credential is presented to a reader or keypad, the system will create an entry in the history log including the user name, time and console information.
Normally a guard user would not have been given any access or alarm control rights. On large sites, multiple readers can be positioned to ensure patrols are being carried out as requested.
U N D E R S TA N D I N G T I M E ZO N E S
Timezones can be used to restrict users from operating doors outside given times.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Master User
Setting this option assigns the user to a master user.
Master users have access to additional menus that ordinary users do not have. See the Menu Referrence
Table in Section 4 for a list of available Master User commands.
To do this, you need to create a timezone. Each timezone includes a maximum or 4 different time periods. Each time period can be set to different days of the week
(including holidays). Then assign one or more user’s to the timezone to specify the access period, day of the week and holidays. This now restricts the user from accessing the system outside the nominated times and days within the timezone.
User
Can only belong to 1 timezone.
Arm Only
Setting this option restricts the user to only turn an area on. The PIN has no access to turn an area off or reset an alarm.
TimeZones
Only one timezone can be linked to each user.
Can Bypass
Setting this option allows the user to manually bypass and un-bypass zones.
Auto Bypass Allowed
Setting this option allows the user to turn an area on when one or more zones are still faulted or open. Upon arming, the area, the keypad will prompt the user to automatically bypass each faulted zone by pressing the
[OK] key.
To prevent users from being able to force arm an area you will need to disable this option.
TimeZone Access Example
1) To set up timezone access, you need to select an
unused timezone from 1 to 16, in this example we will assume timezone access number to be 5.
2) Select timezone 5 and program the times and days
of the week.
3) Then under the user timezone access properties,
assign all users who you wish to restrict to timezone access 5. Remember that you are only able to assign a user to one timezone.
A master code holder is able to change the timezones so they can change the access times for a given user. If a user tries to operate the system outside their assigned timezone periods, then access will be denied.
5-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Access > User Properties >
TimeZone Access
-
MENU 1-4-4
0 1
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
This menu is used to assign a user to a timezone. Time zones are used to restrict user access to be within specific times. Each user can only be assigned to one time zone.
Setting this option to 1 will give the user 24 hour access to the system.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [4] and select the user
from the list and press [OK].
TimeZone Access Ur1
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to select the time
zone (00 to 16) that you want the user to follow, then press [OK] to save and exit.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
Door Assignment
-
MENU 1-4-5
1 Door 1 Name
2 Door 2 Name
3 Door 3 Name
4 Door 4 Name
5 Door 5 Name
6 Door 6 Name
7 Door 7 Name
8 Door 8 Name
9 Door 9 Name
10 Door 10 Name
11 Door 11 Name
12 Door 12 Name
13 Door 13 Name
14 Door 14 Name
15 Door 15 Name
16 Door 16 Name
This menu allows you to assign each user to one or multiple doors. A door assignment is used to allow and/ or restrict which users have access to various keypads, readers and outputs.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [5] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
0 0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
door assignment, then press the [ON] key to select or the [OFF] key to deselect.
Door 1 Name
Door 2 Name
Door 3 Name
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all required door assignments
are programmed, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
5-9
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > User Properties >
User Expire Date
-
MENU 1-4-6
By default, the user expire date for each user is set to 1
January 2100 which ensures that each user practially never expires. If a programmed user expire date is reached, all user credentials including PIN, fingerprint, token, RF keyfob etc will be disabled and a log entry made
(eg. Ur003 John Smith User Expired).
A master user cannot be expired and the master user is allowed to change another user's expire date. To return the expire date to default, press the [OFF] key to allow the user to operate indefinitely, or press the [ON] key to set the date to the current system date, then make the necessary adjustments to achive the required expired time.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [4] + [6] and select the user
from the list then press [OK].
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the day,
month and year. Use the left and right keys to move the cursor between the day month and year.
User Expire Date Ur1
Expire Date
01 Jan 2100
Press OK to SAVE
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Length
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - Variable
01 - 1 Digit
02 - 2 Digits
03 - 3 Digits
04 - 4 Digits
05 - 5 Digits
PIN Length
MENU 1-5-0
06 - 6 Digits
07 - 7 Digits
08 - 8 Digits
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current PIN length.
0 4
At factory default, all user PINs are set to be 4 digits long.
This menu allows you to change the length for all PIN codes.
If you select the variable PIN length option, then you are free to create PINs with different lengths. For example
User 1 could have a 4 digit PIN number while user 3 can have an 8 digit PIN number.
Variable PIN lengths are useful for increasing security levels. Another use would be to program a single digit
PIN to trigger an output. To do this create a user that is not assigned to an area and then map this to the required output.
04 - 4 Digit Length
Press
0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Select the required PIN length using the up and
down arrow keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Setting the user option 'Master PIN' for a user will
override the user expire date.
Access > Global Properties >
PIN Retry Count
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 1-5-1
0 6
This menu sets how many times an invalid PIN can be entered before the keypad will be quarantined or locked out.
See MENU 6-1-8 — Keypad Lockout Time to set the lockout time period.
An access denied report will be sent to the base station when the keypad is quanrantined. If keypad lockout is not required set this option to 0.
The PIN retry count is reset every time the corresponding area is turned All On, Part On or Off.
The PIN retry count is not applicable for invalid tokens swiped at proximity readers or fingerprints presented at biometric readers.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current PIN retry count.
PIN Retry Count
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
5-10 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
2) Enter the required PIN Retry Count using the up
and down arrow keys then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entries are 1 - 15 , 0 = Unlimited.
Access > Global Properties >
Installer PIN
MENU 1-5-2
1 2 3 4 A A A A
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu sets the Installer PIN. The installer can access all menu functions and can also disarm one or multiple areas. The installer PIN canbe up to 8 digits long.
The factory default Installer PIN is 1234.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [5] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Installer PIN.
Installer PIN
1234AAAA
Press OK to SAVE
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > Reporting >
Access Options
1 Access Granted
2 Access Denied
3 Egress Granted
4 Egress Denied
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 1-6-1
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
The above options are programmable per ???.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Access Granted
Access Denied
Egress Granted
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
2) Enter the new installer PIN, then press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Access > Reporting >
Access Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
MENU 1-6-0
0 0
This menu programs the destination for access reports.
Only one option can be programmed in this menu.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [6] + [0] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the numeric keys 0-9 or the up and down arrow
keys to select the desired option.
Access Route
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Access Granted
This option allows the control panel to report 'Access Granted' events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Access Denied
This option allows the control panel to report 'Access Denied' events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Egress Granted
This option allows the control panel to report 'Egress Granted' events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
Egress Denied
This option allows the control panel to report ' Egress Denied' events using the destination set in MENU 1-6-0.
00 - Log Events Only
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
5-11
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Access Programming
Access > Fingerprint >
Add Fingerprint
-
MENU 1-8-0
This menu allows the installer or master user to assign a fingerprint ID to any users. Only one fingerprint can be assigned to each user. To change a fingerprint for an existing user you will need to first delete the old fingerprint before adding the new one.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list users that dont already have fingerprint assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
2) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to learn
the user’s ID. As you learn the fingerprint, the reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the fingerprint has been learnt.
Press OK to delete
Fingerprint for Ur1
User 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
Access > Fingerprint >
Fingerprint Status
-
MENU 1-8-2
This menu allows the Installer to identify the user ID of the fingerprint.
2) Select which fingerprint reader that you want to
use to learn the user’s fingerprint.
Fp6 Keypad 6 Name
Exit
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the reader in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list readers that have been configured.
Fp6 Keypad 6 Name
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
Press
OK or MENU
3) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to learn
the user’s ID. As you learn the fingerprint, the reader will sound a single beep to confirm that the fingerprint has been learnt.
Position Finger for Ur1
John Smith at Fp6
2) Present the finger to be fingerprint reader to read
the user’s fingerprint until a single beep has been heard.
Position Finger at
Fp6
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
i
Note
When you add a new fingerprint, it will be
automatically loaded into all biometric readers.
Fingerprint readers are ready only once the blue light is steady.
3) The keypad will display the user ID that the
fingerprint has been assigned to.
Finger belongs to Ur1
John Smith
Press OK or MENU
Access > Fingerprint >
Delete Fingerprint
-
MENU 1-8-1
This menu allows the Installer or master user to delete a user’s fingerprint ID.
1) Enter [MENU] + [1] + [8] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the user in the list then press [OK]. The system will only list users that have a fingerprint assigned.
Ur1 John Smith
Ur2 Debbie Smith
Ur3 User 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
5-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 6
Area Programming
T he control panel has 8 different areas each with its own specific programmable options.
Under the commands menu you can interrogate the status of an area, turn chime mode on/off, move to an area or arm and disarm a specific area.
The customer account number is programmable for each individual area as well as input, output and general options. Each time you are presented with an option that is area specific, the menu will prompt you to specify the area first.
Partitioning
The control system can be partitioned into 8 individual areas. Each area has its own individual properties which determine how the area operates. The default name for
Area 1 is “Security System” and it can be changed to any other name using the area properties menu. All zones and users are assigned to Area 1 so no assigning of users or zones is required for non partitioned systems by default.
To create an area, assign one or more zones to the area of your choice. A zone can only belong to one area and any number of zones can belong to a single area. Each area operates independently from other areas as if it were another security panel and there are numerous options available to tailor just how the entire system should operate. If you require a common area that automatically arms when all other areas are armed, and disarms as soon as any other area is disarmed, then Area 1 can be set as a common area. To make area 1 a common area, set the option under MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options.
All keypads connected to the system have the ability to display the arm/disarm condition of every area at the same time using the area icons on the display. This is selectable per keypad under MENU 6-1-5 — Indicator Options.
Once you log onto a keypad using your [PIN] + [OK] the system knows who you are and will allow you to use the left arrow key to move from the current area to the next area that your assigned to. To move areas without having to enter your PIN select the option under MENU
6-1-2 — Area Options and then simply step through all the available areas using the arrow keys. Each keypad is assigned a home area and will automatically revert back to this area after 60 seconds.
The system outputs must be configured to operate for their corresponding areas. The external siren, internal siren and strobe outputs are defaulted to output index 0 and will operate for any area.
Example: Simple Two Area System
1) Assign zones to area 1 and area 2
2) Assign the home areas for the keypads.
3) Assign users to areas.
4) Set outputs to operate individually or common for
all areas.
5) Set account number for each area.
6) Set options,
PIN to change areas or just arrow keys.
Which keypads to display area icons.
Reset sirens by any user on any area.
A R E A CO M M A N D S
Areas > Commands >
Area Status
-
-
-
MENU 2-0-0
This command allows you to view the condition of any area in the system. In the following example, Area 1 has the name “Security System” and it is currently in the disarmed state.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [0] and select the area to
view and press [OK].
Security System A1
Disarmed
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following states:
Disarmed - when the area is turned off.
Armed All On - when the area has been turned All On.
Armed Partial - when the area has been turned Part On.
Armed Part 2 - when the area has been turned Part 2 On.
6-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610BI
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Commands >
Turn Area On/Off
-
-
MENU 2-0-1
Areas > Commands >
Move To Area
-
-
MENU 2-0-4
This command allows you to turn on or off areas. If an area has already been turned All On or Part On, a ‘tick’ () will be displayed on the right side of the area name.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [1] and select the area
and press [OK] to change the current state.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
Areas > Commands >
Turn All Areas On
-
-
MENU 2-0-2
This command allows you to turn on all areas that your
PIN has been assigned to at the same time. An alternative method for arming all areas is to enter your PIN then press and hold the [ON] key for 2 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [2]. The keypad will
display the exit time bar to prompt you to exit all areas. You should leave all areas now.
When exit time has expired, the keypad will display that all areas are turned All On (armed).
Each keypad on the system can operate any area, however you can only operate the area which is currently being displayed. This menu allows you to change the current keypad view from one area to display another area.
An alternative method for changing the current area being displayed is to enter your PIN and then press the left or right arrow keys. Keep pressing the arrow key until the desired area is displayed. Only areas which have been assigned to the PIN will be available for view.
If you move to another area, the keypad will automatically revert back to its assigned home area after 2 minutes. See
MENU 6-1-3 - Home Area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [4] and select the area
from the list and press [OK] to move to the selected area.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
i
Note
Turn off option - see MENU 6-1-2, PIN To Change Area
and just use the [
←] and [→] keys to move through
all areas on the system without the need to enter your PIN.
Area 1 Name
EXIT NOW
Areas > Commands >
Chime On/Off
-
-
-
MENU 2-0-5
i
Note
The display area icons option is programmable per
keypad. If this option has not been selected then area icons 1 to 8 will not be displayed. See Menu 6-1-5 —
Indicator Options.
Areas > Commands >
Turn All Areas Off
-
-
MENU 2-0-3
This command allows you to turn off all areas that your PIN has been assigned to at the same time. This command cannot be accessed from a keypad that is in the armed state. An alternative method for disarming all areas is to enter your PIN, then press and hold the [OFF] key for 2 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [0] + [3] to disarm all areas.
Chime mode allows you to monitor a zone (or group of zones) by sounding the keypad buzzer or activating a programmable output. This can be useful when you need to monitor the front or back entrance to a premises while in the disarmed state.
To select which zones will be monitored for chime, see
MENU 3-0-3 — Set Chime Zones.
1) To turn chime mode on or off, enter [MENU] + [2] +
[0] + [5] and select the area from the list then press
[OK].
Security System A1
Chime is OFF.
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
i
Note
The chime tone will only be heard on keypads
programmed to sound the chime tone. See MENU
6-1-5 — Chime Tone
6-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Areas > Commands >
Chime Mode
-
MENU 2-0-6
The chime mode option allows you to program how chime zones will operate on an area by area basis. In latching mode a valid PIN will need to be entered to reset the chime alarm.
It is possible to stop the chime alarm if the door is left open for a long period of time or to only trigger the chime alarm if the door is left open for a period of time.
Available options include;
Chime Always
Chime For 000 Seconds
Chime After 000 Seconds
Chime Latching
1) To set the required chime mode, enter [MENU] + [2]
+ [0] + [6] and select the area from the list then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
A R E A P R O P E R T I E S
Areas > Area Properties >
Area Name
-
MENU 2-1-0
S e c u r i t y S y s t e m
This menu allows you to program the name for each area. Each area name can be programmed with up to 20 characters. At factory default, only Area 1 is used. The control panel can have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [0] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Area Name A1
Security System
Press OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
required chime mode. If the chosen type requires a time parameter use the right arrow to move to the time field and then use the up and down arrow key to select the appropriate time. When finished press
[OK].
Chime Mode A1
Chime For 000 Seconds
Press OK to SAVE i
Note
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Areas > Area Properties >
General Options
1 Exit Time Restart
2 Reset Alarm Memory
3 Duress Allowed
4 Fault ACK Required
5 One Key Arming
6 One Key Part On
7 Link To Common Area
8 One Key Part Off
The above options are programmable per area.
MENU 2-1-1
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Exit Time Restart
Reset Alarm Memory
Duress Allowed
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
6-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Exit Time Restart
The exit delay timer will restart (once per arming cycle) when the same entry/exit delay zone is faulted a second time during exit delay (eg. If an entry/exit delay zone is unsealled, restored and unsealled a second time during exit delay = exit time restart).
Reset Alarm Memory
Clears all alarm memories displayed on the keypad when a user has turned the corresponding area off. If this option is not set, alarm memory will continue to display until the user has turned the corresponding area on again.
Duress Allowed
If a user is being forced to turn off the security system under duress, they can disarm the system and initiate a silent duress alarm.
To trigger the duress alarm enter your PIN then repeat the last two digits of your PIN before pressing [ON], [OFF], or [OK] key.
Example:
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is off,
Enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OK] or [ON].
If your PIN is 2580, to send a duress report when the area is on,
Enter, [2] [5] [8] [0] + [8] [0] + [OFF].
Fault ACK Required
If this option has been programmed, the control panel will force a user to acknowledge each trouble condition even though the trouble condition has already cleared.
If this option is not programmed, any trouble condition that occurs will not have to be acknowledged if it has already been rectified or cleared.
One Key Arming
This option allows users to simply press the [ON] key to turn the area All On. All zones being armed must be sealed. If open and close reports are programmed, the user ID number will report as 000.
One Key Part On
This option allows users to simply press the [Part On] key to turn the area Part On. All zones being armed must be sealed. If open and close reports for Part On is programmed, the user ID number will report as 000.
Link To Common Area
This option causes the selected area or areas to control the common area. If this option is not selected for an area then it will be able to operate independant of the common area. See MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options to enable the common area.
6-4
One Key Part Off
This option allows users to disarm from Part On or Part 2
On, simply by pressing the [OFF] key. This function will only work if there are no alarms in effect, and the entry timer is not running.
Areas > Area Properties >
Input Options
1 Non Sequential
2 Pulse Count H/Over
3 Senior Watch
4 Reset Smoke On Arming
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Auto Arm In Part 1
MENU 2-1-2
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [2] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Non Sequential
Pulse Count H/Over
Senior Watch
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Non Sequential
With non-sequential entry path, you can trigger handover zones in any order provided that an entry delay zone was triggered first.
If this option is not programmed, handover zones must be triggered in numerical sequence provided that an entry delay zone was triggered first.
If a handover zone is triggered before an entry delay zone is triggered an instant alarm will occur.
Pulse Count H/Over
This option allows zones from the same area that have both pulse count and pulse count time programmed the ability to hand over pulses to other pulse count zones during their respective pulse count time. Only zones that have an active pulse count time can accept pulse count handover from another zone.
Burglary delay zones can only handover pulses to other burglary delay zones. Burglary instant and/or handover zones can handover pulses to other burglary instant and/ or handover zones. 24 hour non-fire zone types can only
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
handover pulses to other 24 hour non fire zones. A 24hour fire zone can only handover pulses to another 24hour fire zone.
Senior Watch
This option requires at least one burglary zone in the corresponding area to be faulted and restored during the senior watch time. If no burglary zone has register during the senior watch time, the keypad will sound an alarm.
To warn the user that senior watch time is about to expire, the keypad will sound the auto arm pre-alert time
(if programmed) prior to sounding the alarm. See MENU
2-8-6 — Senior Watch Time.
This feature is not applicable when the corresponding area is turned All On.
An output (Output Event Type 51) can be programmed to operate as follow senior watch if required.
Reset Smoke On Arming
This option when set, will trigger any output that is programmed as event type 49 - Smoke Sensor GND to operate on the next arming cycle, therefore resetting the connected smoke sensors each time the area is armed.
If this option is not set then a manual reset will need to be performed via MENU 3-0-5.
Auto Arm In Part 1
At factory default when assigning a timezone to an area for automatic arm and/or disarm, the area will turn All On when the timezone period STOP time has been reached and the area will turn off (disarm) when the timezone period START time has been reached.
In version 2.24 or later, setting this option allows the area to automatically turn Part On when the timezone period
STOP time has been reached and the area will turn off
(disarm) only if the area is already Part On when the timezone period START time has been reached.
Areas > Area Properties >
Output Options
1 SPK Beeps Keyfob
2 SPK Beeps Key/Sw
3 SPK Strobe In Part On
4 Alarm On PIN Retry
5 Alarm Exit Error
6 Alarm Key/Sw Tamper
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 2-1-3
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
SPK Beeps Keyfob
SPK Beeps Key/SW
SPK Strobe In Part ON
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
SPK Beeps Keyfob
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output to verify to the user that they have successfully turned the area On or Off using the RF keyfob. The speaker output will sound one beep for Off (disarm), two beeps for All On and three beeps for Part On.
SPK Beeps Key/Sw
This option allows audible beeps via the speaker output to verify to the user that they have successfully turned the area On or Off using a keyswitch input. The speaker output will sound one beep for Off (disarm), two beeps for All On and three beeps for Part On.
SPK Strobe In Part On
This option allows the strobe and audible alarms to operate when the area is turned Part On or Part 2 On.
Alarm On PIN Retry
When the PIN retry count as programmed in MENU 1-5-1 is reached, an audible alarm will occur.
Alarm Exit Error
This option allows you to sound an alarm when an exit error occurs.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone becomes unsealed during the exit delay time and remains unsealed at the end of exit delay time. If this happens, the entry delay will start. If the area is not turned off (disarmed) before the entry delay time expires, an alarm will occur.
Alarm Key/Sw Tamper
This option allows you to sound an alarm when a tamper condition occurs on a zone programmed as a keyswitch input. Refer to MENU 3-1-1 — Zone Type for information on programming zones to be a keyswitch input.
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [3] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
6-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Area Properties >
Reporting Options
1 Report PIN Retry
2 Report Exit Error
3 Smart Lockout
4 Reserved
5 Cancel Report
6 Reserved
7 Op/Cl In Part On
8 Op/Cl After Alarm
MENU 2-1-4
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
Op/Cl After Alarm
When set, the panel will only send an 'Open' or 'Close' report after an alarm has occured. This report will be sent for all users regardless of whether or not they have been programmed to send open/close reports.
Areas > Area Properties >
Strobe Trigger
1 Audible Burglary
2 Silent Burglary
3 Fire Alarm
4 Keyfob On/Off
5 Keyswitch On/Off
6 Reserved
7 24Hr Alarm
8 Reserved
MENU 2-1-5
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [4] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Report PIN Retry
Report Exit Error
Smart Lockout
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Report PIN Retry
When the PIN retry count as programmed in MENU 1-5-1 is reached, a 'Wrong Code Entry' alarm report will be sent to the control room.
Report Exit Error
This option allows the system to report an 'Exit Error' alarm report.
An exit error occurs when an entry/exit delay zone becomes unsealled during exit delay time and remains unsealled at the end of exit delay time. If this happens, the entry delay will start. If the area is not turned off
(disarmed) before the entry delay time expires an 'Exit
Error' alarm report will be sent.
Smart Lockout
Smart lockout allows a previously locked zone to reactivate during the siren run time when a new alarm event occurs.
Cancel Report
When set, a 'Cancel' report will be sent if a user disarms the area before the siren timer expires.
Op/Cl In Part On
When set, the panel will send 'Open' or 'Close' reports when the area has been turned Part On or Part 2 On.
6-6
Programming any of these options allow the strobe output to operate when the corresponding event occurs. The strobe light must be connected to an output programmed as a event type 48 for it to operate. See
Section 8 — Output Programming for more information on output event types.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [5] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Audible Burglary
Silent Burglary
Fire Alarm
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Audible Burglary
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when an audible burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
Silent Burglary
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a silent burglary zone has triggered an alarm.
Fire Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a zone programmed as fire (audible or silent) has triggered an alarm.
Keyfob On/Off
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output for six seconds when a user turns the area on via an RF keyfob. This provides silent feedback to the user that the signal has been received.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Keyswitch On/Off
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output for six seconds when a user turns the area on via a keyswitch zone or the programmable input. This provides silent feedback to the user that the signal has been received when turning the area on or off.
24Hr Alarm
When selected, the panel will activate the strobe output when a zone programmed as 24-hour (audible or silent) has registered an alarm. Zones programmed as 24-Hour
Hold-Up are not included.
Areas > Area Properties >
Part Mode 1 Name
P a r t 1 A r e a
-
MENU 2-1-6
1 N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each area when turning the area Part On or Part 2 On. Each area name can be programmed with up to 20 characters. At factory default, only Area 1 is used. The control panel can have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [6] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Part Mode 1 Name A1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Area Properties >
Part Mode 2 Name
P a r t 2 A r e a 1
-
MENU 2-1-7
N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each area when turning the area Part On or Part 2 On. Each area name can be programmed with up to 20 characters. At factory default, only Area 1 is used. The control panel can have a maximum of 8 independent areas programmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [6] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Part Mode 2 Name A1
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
i
Note
Part 2 Area 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Part 1 Area 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
Areas > Area Properties >
Auto Arming
-
MENU 2-1-8
0 0
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the area name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
i
Note
See Alpha Text section in Section 4 - Programming
Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
This menu allows you to assign which time zone the area will follow to automatically turn the area All On and/or off (disarm). Only one time zone can be assigned to each area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [1] + [8] and select the area
from the list and press [OK].
Auto Arming A1
00 - Disabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the arrow and number keys to select the time
zone that you want the area to follow, then press
[OK] to save and exit.
6-7
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
A R E A R E P O R T I N G
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 1
MENU 2-2-0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The area account number identifies which control panel is reporting to the security company’s base station receiver.
Each destination can have a different account number programmed. The number should be entered from left to right with trailing zeros.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [0] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new account
number. Use the up and down arrows to select special characters BCDEF.
Account Dest 1 A1
Areas > Reporting >
Open Close Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
MENU 2-2-2
0 1
This menu programs the destination for open and close reports. Only one option can be programmed in this menu.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [2] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the numeric keys 0-9 or the up and down arrow
keys to select the desired option.
Open Close Route A1
0000000000
Press OK to SAVE
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Reporting >
Account Dest 2
MENU 2-2-1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The area account number identifies which control panel is reporting to the security company’s base station receiver.
Each destination can have a different account number programmed. The number should be entered from left to right with trailing zeros.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [2] + [1] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new account
number. Use the up and down arrows to select special characters BCDEF.
Account Dest 2 A1
0000000000
Press OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
A R E A S T I M E R S
Areas > Timers >
Exit Time
-
MENU 2-8-0
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to set the exit time for each area. Exit delay time can be programmed between 0 and
255 seconds. The exit time starts when an area is turned
All On or Part On/Part 2 On (armed).
At factory default, when turning an area All On, the keypad will sound the exit warning tone. When turning an area Part On or Part 2 On, only a single beep at the end of exit time will be heard. See MENU 6-1-5 to allow the exit warning tone to be heard when turning an area Part
On or Part 2 On.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [0]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current exit time set for the area selected.
6-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Exit Time A1
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No Exit Time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current entry time set for the area selected.
Entry Time 1 A1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Timers >
Entry Time 2
-
MENU 2-8-2
0 4 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to set the entry delay time for each area. The entry delay time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds. This should be set to allow the user enough time to turn the area off (disarm) before an alarm condition occurs (eg. end of entry time = alarm).
The entry delay timer starts as soon as a user faults a zone programmed as burglary delay 2 (eg. opens the back door) after the area has been turned on and the exit delay timer has expired.
Areas > Timers >
Entry Time 1
-
MENU 2-8-1
0 2 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to set the entry delay time for each area. The entry delay time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds. This should be set to allow the user enough time to turn the area off (disarm) before an alarm condition occurs (eg. end of entry time = alarm).
The entry delay timer starts as soon as a user faults a zone programmed as burglary delay 1 (eg. opens the front door) after the area has been turned on and the exit delay timer has expired.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [2]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current entry time set for the area selected.
Entry Time 2 A1
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [1]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
040 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No entry tTime.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
020 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No exit time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Timers >
Part Entry Time
-
MENU 2-8-3
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu sets the time period which a keypad will sound its warning tone after a zone is triggered in Part On or Part
2 On modes. The user must disarm the area before the
Part Entry Time expires, otherwise an alarm condition will be triggered.
At factory default, when an area has been turned Part On or Part 2 On and exit time has finished, violating a non 24hr burglary zone will start the part entry time. The keypad will sound the hi/lo tone for a period of 60 seconds before the control panel sound an alarm or until the user turns the area off.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
6-9
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
The part entry time will start when any of the following zone types area faulted and set to be monitored for Part
On or Part 2 On.
Burglary Delay 1
Burglary Delay 2
Burglary Instant
Burglary Inst No Exit
Burglary Handover
Only the installer or a master user can set the part entry time for each area (001 to 255 seconds). Programming 001 seconds allows all non 24 hour burglary zones (including delay zones) to act as if they were all instant zones when the area is turned Part On or Part 2 On. Programming 000 seconds allows all non 24 hour burglary zones to operate as they would if the area has been turned All On.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [3]. The keypad will
display a list of areas.
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU within the same area will sound a warning tone to alert users that the area will soon automatically turn All On.
The auto arm pre-alert timer allows users the opportunity to abort automatic arming for that set arming period, or alternatively delay the area automatically turning All On by 1 hour, by entering their PIN + [OFF] and then selecting the option they require. If the user selects the option to delay the auto arm, this sequence will repeat again
1 hour later untill the area is turned All On manually or automatically.
To set up a timezone - see TimeZones.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Pre-Alert Time.
Auto Arm Pre Alert
000 Minutes
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the pre-alert time .
Valid times are 0 to 255 minutes. 0 = No Auto Arm
Pre Alert.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Highlight the area required to change, then press
[OK] to select. The keypad will display the current part entry time set for the area selected.
Part Entry Time A1
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the required entry
time in seconds. Valid times are 1 - 255 seconds, 0
= No exit time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Timers >
Auto Arm Pre-Alert
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 2-8-4
0 1 0
Minutes
This menu allows the installer to program the auto arm pre-alert timer that is global for all areas. The auto arm pre-alert timer can be programmed between 001 and 255 seconds / 000 = disabled.
For the auto arm pre-alert timer to operate, it requires at least one area to follow a timezone. When the stop time and day of the week programmed within a period of the timezone has been met, the control panel will commence the auto arm pre-alert time. When the auto arm pre-alert time has expired, the area will automatically turn All On.
During the auto arm pre-alert time, the keypads assigned
Areas > Timers >
Senior Watch Time
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 2-8-6
0 0 0
Hours
This feature can be used to verify that an elderly person is OK or as a dead man timer for an onsite patrolman or security officer.
This menu allows you to program the Senior Watch Time period. The panel must register at least one burglary zone in the programmed area to unseal and reseal during this time period or the panel will report a Senior Watch alarm to the base station.
A Senior Watch Restore will be sent when. at least one zone is unsealed and resealed. Senior Watch monitoring is only active when the corresponding area is in the disarmed state.
1) Press [MENU] + [2] + [8] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current senior watch time. (default = 0 hours).
Senior Watch Time
000 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new senior watch
time. Valid times are 001 to 255 hours. 000 = No
Senior Watch Time.
6-10 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
A R E A T E S T I N G
Areas > Area Testing >
Area Watch
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 2-9-0
0 1 2
Weeks
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Area Testing >
Service Interval
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 2-9-2
0 0 0
Weeks
This menu programs the number of weeks (001 – 255 weeks / 000 = disabled) an area can remain disarmed before registering an ‘Inactivity Interval’ report. A restore signal will be sent when the area is next armed and the exit time expires.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks programmed for area watch.
Area Watch
This menu sets the number of weeks between service intervals. When a service interval is due, a trouble condition will display on the keypad to remind the customer that a system check is required by the security company. When viewing the trouble condition, the keypad will display ‘Call
For Service’. To clear the trouble condition, the installer must enter and exit installer’s programming mode.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks between installer service intervals.
Service Interval
000 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
012 Weeks
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks
that an area can remain turned off betore a trouble condition will occur. Valid entries are 1 – 255 weeks or 000 to disable.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of weeks
between each service interval. Valid entries are 1 –
255 weeks or 000 to disable.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Areas > Area Testing >
User Test Interval
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 2-9-1
0 0 0
Days
This menu sets the number of days before it will prompt the user to walk test the system. To clear the trouble condition, you will need to perform the ‘Walk Test’ function.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current number of weeks between user test intervals.
User Test Interval
000 Days
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of days
between each user test interval. Valid entries are 1
– 255 days or 000 to disable.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
6-11
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Area Programming
Areas > Area Testing >
Test Options
1 User Test Required
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Walk Test Report
7 Walk Test 24Hr
8 Walk Test Fire
MENU 2-9-3
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
The above options are programmable per area.
1) Enter [MENU] + [2] + [9] + [3] and select the area
from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
User Test Required
Reserved
Reserved
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
User Test Required
This option allows the keypad assigned to the corresponding area to display a trouble condition when a user test is due. The trouble condition can be cleared by performing a walk test.
Walk Test Report
This option allows the corresponding area to send 'Walk
Test' reports when a user enters/exits walk test mode and test zones.
Walk Test 24Hr
This option allows any 24-hour (non-fire) zone assigned to the corresponding area to be tested during walk test.
Walk Test Fire
This option allows 24-hour fire zone assigned to the corresponding area to be tested during walk test.
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
6-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 7
Input Programming
T he control panel is capable of controlling up to 144 inputs in either hardwire and/or wireless configuration.
Each input can have its own unique name up to 20 characters to identify it on the system for display and reporting purposes. job when doing a change over. Input zones can be setup as alarm only, alarm + tamper or even split end of line.
For normally open contacts the system is wired exactly the same as for normally closed but there is an option provided that inverts the sealed state of a zone.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the status of any input, bypass a zone, define which zones will operate in chime mode, define which zones operate in part 2 mode and reset smoke detectors.
When arming the system, all zones will be tested by default and you may wish to turn this option off for certain zones so that you don’t continually alert the operator during arming.
There is a command called 'Zone Array' that allows the installer to view the condition of inputs in banks of 16.
This is extremely helpful when commissioning a system or fault finding.
The sensor watch feature lets you monitor zones to ensure that they are working and detecting movement within a determined programmable period.
There are numerous configurations for each hardwire input. The end of line resistor can be configured to eliminate the need to change the end of line resistors on a
ZO N E A S S I G N M E N TS
Zones by default can be bypassed and you should disable this option for zones you don’t want to be able to bypass, for example 24hr, fire, holdup or panic zone types.
Zone Assignment Table
Address Setting
Module
Number
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Zone
Numbers
(Single EOL)
Zone
Numbers
(Alarm+Tamper
EOL)
Single or Alarm
+ Tamper EOL
With CM705B +
CM707B Module
Zone
Numbers
(Split EOL)
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
Control Panel
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
1 - 8
17 to 24
33 to 40
49 to 56
65 to 72
81 to 88
97 to 104
OFF ON ON OFF OFF 113 to 120
ON ON ON OFF OFF 129 to 136
1 - 8
17 to 24
33 to 40
49 to 56
65 to 72
81 to 88
97 to 104
113 to 120
129 to 136
N/A
17 to 24
25 to 32
33 to 40
41 to 48
49 to 56
57 to 64
65 to 72
73 to 80
81 to 88
89 to 96
97 to 104
105 to 112
113 to 120
121 to 128
129 to 136
137 to 144
1 - 16
17 to 32
33 to 48
49 to 64
65 to 80
81 to 96
97 to 112
113 to 128
129 to 144
Table 20: Zones Assignments To Modules
7-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
The PGM input is a special input that can be configured to accept data from a number of different RF receiver manufacturers or simply be used as an keyswitch input.
The tamper options configure the system behaviour for cabinet tamper alarms and also for the cabinet tamper of the peripheral devices.
S = Zone 02 is Shorted
A = Zone 03,05,07 are in Alarm (Unsealed)
T = Zone 08 is in Tamper Alarm (Unsealed)
- = Zone 04, 09-16 are Disabled (Unused)
3) The keypad will display the following zone array
information for Zones 97 to 112.
I N P U T CO M M A N D S
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Status
-
-
-
MENU 3-0-0
9990000000000111 1
7890123456789012 0
---------------- 0
Press OK or MENU
This menu allows you to view the zone status of each zone
(i.e. Normal, Alarm or Tamper etc).
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [0] and select the zone
you want to view from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the zone number to view then press [OK].
2) The keypad will display the zone status and EOL
resistance value.
Zone 1 Name Zn1
EOL=Normal 06523 Ohms
4) The keypad will display the following zone array
information for Zones 113 to 128.
1111111222222222 1
3456789012345678 0
---------------- 0
Press OK or MENU
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Press OK or MENU
Inputs > Commands >
Bypass Zones
-
-
MENU 3-0-2
3) Press the [OK] key to exit.
Inputs > Commands >
Zone Array
-
MENU 3-0-1
This menu allows you to view zones in groups of sixteen.
The top two rows of the display show the zone number, the third row displays the zone status
N= NORMAL
S = SHORTED
A= ALARM
T= TAMPER
- = DISABLED
If a 100 is displayed at the right hand side of the top line, it means that you are displaying zones 97 to 112 or zones
113 to 128 etc. See example.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to select the zone group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following zone array information for zones 1 to 16.
This menu allows users with the appropriate access level to manually bypass zones effectively removing them from the area for the current arming cycle. All zone types including 24hour zones can be bypassed. Bypassed zones will be reset when the area is turned off or disarmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [2]. A list of zones that
can be bypassed will display on the keypad. A tick displayed on the right side of the zone name indicates that the zone is already bypassed.
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Using the up and down arrow keys highlight the
zone that you want to bypass, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number that you want to bypass, then press [OK]. If the zone is bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
Zone 1 Name Zn1 is bypassed. To un-bypass, press OFF.
Press OK or MENU
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NSA-ANAT--------
Press OK or MENU
3) If the zone is not bypassed, the keypad will prompt:
In the above example screen,
N = Zone 01 and 06 are Normal (Sealed)
7-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Zone 1 Name Zn1 is un-bypassed. To bypass, press ON.
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone bypass state
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
5) Repeat steps 1 to 4 to bypass or un-bypass
additional zones.
Inputs > Commands >
Set Chime Zones
-
MENU 3-0-3
This menu allows you to program zones to be monitored when chime mode is turned on. Chime mode is ideal for monitoring a front door in a shop, a pool gate or other entrance points. To sound the keypad buzzer when a chime zone is opened (faulted). See MENU 6-1-5 —
Indicator Options. To turn on chime mode - see MENU
2-0-5 - Chime Mode On/Off.
Chime mode only works when the area is disarmed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [3] and use the up and
down arrow keys to highlight the area from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
zone you want to program, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly then press [OK]. A tick mark displayed on the right side of the zone name indicates that the zone is already set for chime.
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Inputs > Commands >
Set Part 2 Zones
-
MENU 3-0-4
This menu allows you to program which zones are to be excluded or bypassed when an area has been turned On in Part Mode 2.
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the area from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
zone(s) that you want to disable in Part 2, then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly then press [OK]. Zones marked with a tick are active and will alarm in Part 2 mode.
Zn1 Front Door
Zn2 Main Bedroom
Zn3 Lounge Window
Press OK or MENU
3) One of the following messages will be displayed
depending on the current zone programming.
4) Press [ON] to arm the zone in Part 2 mode or press
[OK] to exit.
Main Bedroom Zn2
Is not armed in PART2.
To Enable, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
5) Press [OFF] to disarm the zone in Part 2 mode or
press [OK] to exit.
Main Bedroom Zn2
Is armed in PART2.
To remove, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
One of the following messages will be displayed depending on the current zone programming.
Zone 1 Name Zn1
Zone Chime is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
i
Note
The keypad will sound an error tone when a user attempts to disable all zones in an area for Part
Mode 2.
Zone 1 Name Zn1
Zone Chime is ON.
To turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
3) Press [ON] or [OFF] to toggle the zone to be
monitored when chime mode is turned on then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
7-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Inputs > Commands >
Smoke Sensor Reset
-
-
MENU 3-0-5
ZO N E P R O P E R T I E S
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Name
-
MENU 3-1-0
This command allows you to reset smoke sensors.
When initiated this command will cause any outputs programmed as Event Type 49 — Smoke Sensor GND in the chosen area to turn off for 10 seconds.
Z o n e 1 N a m e
This menu allows you to program the name for each zone.
Zone names can be up to 20 characters long.
Programming
Zone Name
Zone Type
Area Assignment
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Time
Door Assignment
Report Route
Reporting Options
Lockout Dialler
Report Alarm
Report Troubles
Report Bypass
Reserved
Reserved
Report Restores
Delay Reporting
Zone Options
Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Bypass Allowed
Sensor Watch
Armed In Part On
No EOL Required
Test On Exit
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [0] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the area that you want to reset the smoke detectors in then press [OK].
1) Enter [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
Smoke Detector reset in progress. Please wait
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Zone Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
2) The keypad will automatically return to the menu
when all smoke detectors in the area has been reset.
Zone Name Zn1
i
Note
Smoke detectors must have the negative power
terminal connected to an output programmed as
Event Type 49 for this command to work.
Zone 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 -
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
ZO N E D E FAU LT TA B L E
The table below lists the default values for all zone parameters in the control panel. Zones marked as Not Used do not require EOL resistors to be fitted.
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
1 = Delay 1 5 = Handover 5 = Handover 5 = Handover
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
120
0
2
120
0
2
120
0
2
120
0
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Table 21: Zone Defaults
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Zones 5 - 16 Zones 17 - 144
Zone 5 to 16 Zone 17 to 144
3 = Instant 0 = Not Used
1
0
1
0
120
0
2
120
0
2
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
7-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Type
MENU 3-1-1
0 1
00 - Not Used
01 - Burglary Delay 1
02 - Burglary Delay 2
03 - Burglary Instant
04 - Burg Inst No Exit
05 - Burg Handover
06 - Burglary 24Hr
07 - Tamper 24Hr
08 - Hold Up 24Hr
09 - Medical 24Hr
10 - Panic 24Hr
11 - Fire 24Hr
12 - Not Used
13 - Keyswitch Zone
14 - Display Only
15 - Non Burglary 24Hr
This menu allows you to configure the zone type or behaviour for every zone in the system. Each zone should be assigned to a Zone Type that defines the way in which the panel will respond when an alarm is triggered on that zone. Refer to the table and descriptions below for the available Zone Type selections.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Zone
Type required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Zone Type Zn1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
— Exit Time
04 – Burg Inst No Exit
Zones programmed as Instant 2 will immediatly cause the alarm to trigger when the zone is triggered. ie. No
Entry Delay. Zones set as Burglary Instant 2 have NO Exit
Delay and are only active when the area is armed.
05 – Burglary Handover
A Handover zone will provide a delayed alarm only when a delay zone has been tripped first (ie. the entry time is active) otherwise it will trigger an instant alarm.
Zones programmed as Handover can be set to sequential or non-sequential handover. At factory default, handover is set to sequential which means that zone must be triggerred in numerical order for the delay to handover.
Non Sequential Handover means the zone do not have to be programmed in numerical order. In both cases an entry delay zone must be triggered first for the delay to handover.
See MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options to set Non Sequential
Handover.
i
Note
The Zone Types listed above will only trigger an
alarm if the system or area is in the armed state and the exit time has exprired. Zones must be sealled at the end of exit time to trigger alarms.
01 - Burglary Delay 1
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
00 – Not Used
Program the zone type as zero if the zone is not being used.
06 – Burglary 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-hour burglary will trigger an alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Burglary report will be sent to the central station receiver.
01 – Burglary Delay 1
Zones programmed as Delay 1 will cause Entry Timer 1 to start when tripped. The user must disarm the area before entry timer expires or an alarm will occur. Zones set as
Burglary Delay 1 are only active when the area is armed.
See MENU 7-2-1 — Entry Time 1 to set the required delay time.
07 – Tamper 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Tamper will trigger an alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Tamper report will be sent to the central station receiver.
02 – Burglary Delay 2
Zones programmed as Delay 2 will cause Entry Timer 2 to start when tripped. The user must disarm the area before entry timer expires or an alarm will occur. Zones set as
Burglary Delay 2 are only active when the area is armed.
See MENU 7-2-2 — Entry Time 2 to set the required delay time.
08 – Hold Up 24Hr
Zones programmed as 24-Hour Hold Up will trigger a Silent alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. 24-Hour zones are active 24 hours a day. A 24hr Hold Up report will be sent to the central station receiver. No Siren/Strobe or Keypad indication will be given. To view the status of a 24hr hold up zone, refer to MENU 3-0-1.
03 – Burglary Instant
Zones programmed as Instant 1 will immediatly cause the alarm to trigger when the zone is tripped. ie No Entry
Delay. Zones set as Burglary Instant 1 have Exit Delay and are only active when the area is armed. See MENU 7-2-0
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
09 – Medical 24Hr
This zone type is used for personal medical emergency alarms. Zones programmed as 24-Medical will trigger an alarm as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Medical report will be sent to the central station receiver.
7-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
10 – Panic 24Hr
This zone type is used for a general type of emergency including the presence of one or more unwanted persons trying to gain entry to the premises. It will sound an alarm at any time as soon as the zone becomes faulted regardless of what state the area is in. A 24hr Panic report will be sent to the central station receiver.
11 – Fire 24Hr
This zone type is used for Fire and Smoke detector alarms. If the EOL configuration is set for a single EOL value, the correct operation for fire zones are SHORT =
Alarm / OPEN = Trouble. For this to operate correctly, the option 'Smoke Reset On Arming' needs to be disabled for each area. A 24hr Fire report will be sent to the central station receiver.
If a horn speaker is connected and programmed, a distinct fire sound will be heard to indicate that it is a fire alarm that has registered. The fire sound via the horn speaker is different than the burglary sound.
All fire zones that have registered an alarm will continue to display on all keypads until a fire reset has been performed (see MENU 3-0-5), even if the fire zone input has returned back to normal state. During this time, a user will also be prevented the ability to turn the area on or manually bypass the fire zone(s) until a fire reset has been performed.
13 – Keyswitch Zone
A keyswitch zone can be used as an input terminal to turn on and/or off an area. Refer to MENU 3-4-1 —
Keyswitch Options to select the various options such as latching or momentary arm and/or disarm etc. When reporting back to base, the keyswitch user number will follow the actual zone number.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Area Assignment
00 - No Area
01 - Security System
02 - Area 2 Name
03 - Area 3 Name
04 - Area 4 Name
05 - Area 5 Name
06 - Area 6 Name
07 - Area 7 Name
08 - Area 8 Name
MENU 3-1-2
0 1
This menu programs which area or partition each zone belongs to. The system can be partitioned to a maximum of 8 separate areas. Each zone can only be assigned to a single area. For installations requiring a common access point, it is possible to set Area 1 to be a common area. See
MENU 7-7-1 — Area Options
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
Area Assignment Zn1
01 - Security System
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the area that
you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
14 – Display Only
A display zone is not a burglary zone. It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler. Its purpose is to only display on the keypad when faulted.
15 – Non Burglary 24Hr
This zone type operates as a 24-hour type and is used for non-specific alarms such as water level or temperature sensors. i
Note
The 24 Hour Zone Types listed above are active
24hrs a day. They will trigger an alarm regardless of whether or not the system or area is in the Armed,
Part Armed or Disarmed state.
7-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count
MENU 3-1-3
0 0
Pulses
00 - No Pulse Count
01 - 1 Pulse
02 - 2 Pulses
03 - 3 Pulses
04 - 4 Pulses
05 - 5 Pulses
06 - 6 Inertia Pulses
07 - 7 Inertia Pulses
08 - 8 Inertia Pulses
09 - 9 Inertia Pulses
10 - 10 Inertia Pulses
11 - 11 Inertia Pulses
12 - 12 Inertia Pulses
13 - Door Open Too Long
14 - PreDelay
15 - Reserved
Options 1 to 5 set the number of trigger pulses a single zone must receive before an alarm will be tripped. The number of pulses must be detected within the Pulse
Count Time period for an alarm to occur. See MENU 3-1-4
— Pulse Count Time.
Options 6 to 12 sets the number of trigger pulses a single inertia zone must receive before an alarm will be tripped.
The number of pulses must be detected within the Pulse
Count Time period for an alarm to occur. See MENU 3-1-4
- Pulse Count Time.
Option 13 - Door Open Too Long is used for door monitoring. In this mode, the zone operates as a normal zone, however, it doubles up as the input sensing point for Door Open Too Long alarms. The pulse count time programmed in MENU 3-1-4 defines the Door Open Too
Long time that needs to elapse before the system registers a DOTL alarm.
Option 14 - PreDelay programs how long a zone must be faulted before the zone will register an alarm condition.
The pulse count time in MENU 3-1-4 defines how long the zone must stay unsealed before being registered as unsealed. This mode is especially useful when working with refrigeration alarms as you may wish to only trigger an alarm condition if the fridge temperature sensor registers an out of temperature range for a time period before actually triggering the alarm.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
A feature called Pulse Count Handover can be enabled allowing pulses registered by one zone to handover to another zone provided they are the same Zone Type (ie. instant zone to instant zone) and in the same Area. See
MENU 2-1-2 — Input Options
When pulse count hands over from one zone to another and an alarm is triggered, a cross alarm report will be sent to the central station.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current pulse count time for the chosen zone.
Pulse Count Zn1
00 - No Pulse Count
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of pulses
required. Valid entries are 0 – 15 pulses.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Example of Zone Trigger Delay
Configure Zone 3 With Delay of 3 Minutes (180 Seconds)
1. Program zone type etc as per normal. Then set Zone pulse count as seconds (Option 13) in MENU 3-1-3.
2. Set the zone 3 delay multiplier in MENU 3-1-4 as 180.
If zone 3 is faulted and remains faulted for 180 seconds, then an alarm event will be triggered. If the zone returns to normal within the 180 second period, then the timer will reset and no alarm will be registered.
i
Note
In previous versions, a zone programmed with
Option 14 - PreDelay in MENU 3-1-3 would fail to register on the system if the zone was still faulted after the predelay time had expired. In version 2.14, this has been corrected.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
7-7
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Pulse Count Time
7-8
Value
000 - 255
MENU 3-1-4
1 2 0
Seconds
Multiplier
Seconds, Minutes or Hours
U N D E R S TA N D I N G D O O R A S S I G N M E N T
Door Assignments are used to link Readers, Users and
Outputs together to allow you to operate a door strike when a user token is presented to a given reader. To do this you need to create a door assignment and assign the user, the reader and the output to the same door assignment.
Users
A user can belong to multiple Door Assignments.
Outputs
An output can only belong to 1 Door Assignment.
Pulse count time operates in accordance with the pulse count option set in MENU 3-1-3. There are four modes of operation that can be set including:
♦
Pulse Count
♦
Inertia Pulse
♦
Door Open Too Long
♦
PreDelay
When programming the pulse count time, enter the value between 000 to 255, then set the multiplier in seconds, minutes or hours.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current pulse count time.
Pulse Count Time Zn1
120 Second
Press OK to SAVE
2) Use the [
↑] and [↓] keys to set the time required.
Valid entries are 0 – 255 seconds.
3) Use the [
→] key to toggle to cursor and set the multiplier in seconds, minutes or hours using the
[
↑] and [↓] keys.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Reader
A reader can belong to only 1 Door Assignment.
Door Assignment
There are 8 different door assignments.
Door Assignment Example
1) To set up a door assignment you need to select an
unused Door Assignment number from 1 to 8, in this example we will assume the Door Assignment number to be 5.
2) Under user properties assign the users who you
wish to have access to Door Assignment 5.
Remember that you are able to assign users to more than one Door Assignment.
3) Now select the output that will be used to operate
the door strike and assign it to Door Assignment 5.
You also need to set the output type to Door and the polarity to one shot low with a time of how long you would like the strike to operate. Generally a strike would be operated for 5 seconds.
4) Assign the Reader under Keypads and Reader
properties to Door Assignment 5.
When a user who belongs to Door Assignment 5 presents their token to the reader that is assigned to Door
Assignment 5, the assigned output will operate releasing the door strike.
A reader can belong not only to a Door Assignment but also to an Area if arming and disarming is required from the reader.
If a user presents their token to an reader that has an area assigned, then the user Door Assignment and Area
Permissions are both checked. If the area is armed and the user belongs to the same area as the Reader and the same
Door Assignment, the system will disarm and allow access.
If the user does not belong to the same area as the reader but the Door Assignment match, then door access will only be available to that user if the area is disarmed.
When using the same reader for door access as well as arming, you need to select the reader badging option
MENU 6-1-4 — General Options. Badging requires that you present your token 3 times in succession within 5 seconds to arm the system.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Door Assignment
MENU 3-1-5
0 0
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current Zone Report Route.
00 - No Door Assignment
01 - Door 1 Name
02 - Door 2 Name
03 - Door 3 Name
04 - Door 4 Name
05 - Door 5 Name
06 - Door 6 Name
07 - Door 7 Name
08 - Door 8 Name
09 - Door 9 Name
10 - Door 10 Name
11 - Door 11 Name
12 - Door 12 Name
13 - Door 13 Name
14 - Door 14 Name
15 - Door 15 Name
16 - Door 16 Name
This menu allows the installer to assign a zone to a single door. There are 16 different doors available.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current door assignment.
Door Assignment Zn1
00 - No Door Assignment
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the door that
you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Report Route Zn1
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the Report
Route that you want to assign the zone to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
At factory default all Zones are set to report to
Destination 1 and the System Log. See the Zone
Default Table for more information on Zone default settings.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Options
1 Lockout Dialler
2 Report Alarm
3 Report Troubles
4 Report Bypass
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Report Restores
8 Delay Reporting
MENU 3-1-7
i
Note
In previous versions, assigning a door to a zone input
(eg. Display Only zone) that is used for an egress button failed to log events.
The above options are programmable per zone.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. The control panel will now log 'Access Granted' events when the zone input is used for door access.
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Report Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
MENU 3-1-6
0 1
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the Report Options for the currently selected zone.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Lockout Dialler
Report Alarm
Report Troubles
Press OK ON OFF MENU
This menu sets the Zone Report Route or Report
Destination for each individual zone in the system. All events such as alarms and troubles for each zone will be reported according to this menu setting. Each zone can only be assigned to one report route from the list above.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Lockout Dialler
Setting this option will enable Dialler Lockout functionality for the respective zone(s). All zones in the system can be individually programmed for Dialler
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
7-9
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Lockout.
When enabled the zone will be allowed to transmit alarm reports each time it is triggered provided that the Swinger Dialler count has not been reached. If the zone is triggered and the Swinger Dialler count has been reached then the zone will become locked out and no further reports will be sent for that zone. Dialler lockout will be reset on the next arming cycle.
See MENU 5-4-5 — Swinger Dialler to set the number of times a zone is allowed to trigger before being locked out.
Report Alarm
Setting this option will enable the system to Report
Alarm events for the respective zone. All zones in the system can be individually programmed to report alarms.
Report Troubles
Setting this option will enable the system to Report
Trouble events for the respective zone. A Trouble report will be sent if the zone is left unsealled at the end of exit time. All zones in the system can be individually programmed to report trouble events.
Report Bypass
Setting this option will enable the system to Report Zone
Bypass events for the respective zone. A Bypass report will be sent at the end of exit time for zones which have been manually bypassed. All zones in the system can be individually programmed to report Zone Bypass events.
Report Restores
Setting this option allows the system to send Restore reports for zones that have already sent a previous alarm or trouble report on the same arming cycle.
1) Burglary Zone alarms and troubles restore when
the zone reseals or the area is disarmed.
2) 24hr Zone alarms and troubles restore when the
zone reseals.
3) Bypassed Zone restore when the area is disarmed.
Delay Reporting
Setting this option will cause the system to delay alarm reports for the selected zone. This option can be enabled to allow a user to enter their PIN and disable the report in case they have caused a false alarm. If a PIN is not entered within the delay time, the system will trigger the sirens and send the report as normal.
See MENU 5-4-6 — Burg Report Delay and MENU 5-4-7
— Fire Report Delay to set the delay time.
If a PIN code is entered after the delay time has expired, and the sirens are still sounding, the system will send the
Alarm report followed by a Cancel report.
7-10
Inputs > Zone Properties >
Zone Options
1 Lockout Siren
2 Silent Alarm
3 Inverted Seal
4 Bypass Allowed
5 Sensor Watch
6 Armed In Part On
7 No EOL Required
8 Test On Exit
MENU 3-1-8
The above options are programmable per zone.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [1] + [8] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the Zone Options for the currently selected zone.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Lockout Siren
Silent Alarm
Inverted Seal
Press OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Lockout Siren
Setting this option will enable Siren Lockout functionality for the respective zone(s). All zones in the system can be individually programmed for Siren Lockout.
When enabled the respective zone will be allowed to cause the sirens to sound each time a new alarm is triggered provided that the Swinger Siren count has not been reached. If the zone is triggered and the Swinger
Siren count has been reached then the siren will become locked out for that zone and no further siren activations will occur from that zone. Only zones which have been locked out are prevented from triggering the sirens.
Siren lockout will be reset on the next arming cycle.
See MENU 7-4-3 — Swinger Siren to set the shutdown count.
Silent Alarm
Setting this option will set the correspondiing zone to become a silent zone. Audible alarm outputs will not sound when a silent zone is triggered.
Inverted Seal
Setting this option allows a normally-open sensor or device to operate as a normally-closed device by reversing the open/closed state of the zone loop. (eg.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
When the zone loop is open, the system will register the zone loop as closed or normal.)
Bypass Allowed
Setting this option allows users with the appropriate access level to manually bypass this zone effectively removing it from the area for the current arming cycle.
All zone types including 24hour zones can be bypassed if this option is selected. Bypassed zones will be reset when the area is turned off or disarmed.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
A D D I N G R F S E N S O R S
The control panel supports a wide range of 3rd party wireless movement sensors, door contacts and smoke detectors allowing you to choose the most appropriate devices for each installation.
In all cases the RF sensor must be compatible with the RF
Receiver that is installed. See MENU 3-5-0 — Input Type.
Armed In Part On
Setting this option causes the zone to be active or monitored when the corresponding area is armed Part
On.
If this option is not set, the corresponding zone will be inactive when the area is armed Part On allowing users to move freely within this zone and not trigger an alarm.
i
Note
Zones configured as RF zone will follow all other zone
properties.
Sensor Watch
Setting this option causes the system to monitor the zone’s activity while the corresponding area is in the disarmed state. If the zone fails to unseal and reseal at least once during the Sensor Watch Time period a system trouble will be displayed on the keypad and a Sensor
Watch report for the corresponding zone will be sent to the programmed destination. See MENU 3-9-2 — Sensor
Watch to set the time period.
i
Note
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the
area is in the disarmed state. 24 hour zone types cannot be monitored using the Sensor Watch feature.
Inputs > RF Zone >
Add RF Device
MENU 3-3-0
This menu allows you to program an RF device to a zone.
Only one RF device can be used for each zone.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to program in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK].
The system will only list zones that dont already have an RF device programmed.
Enter Device ID Zn1
Zone 1 Name
000000000
Press OK or MENU
No EOL Required
Setting this option allows you to connect a zone loop without the need for an EOL resistor to be fitted as programmed in the global EOL resistor value.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the RF device ID
number, or trigger the RF device tamper to send the RF device ID.
Channel 1
Channel 2
Exit
Press OK or MENU
Test On Exit
Setting this option will cause the system to prompt the user that a zone or zones are not sealled when they attempt to arm the area in which the zone belongs.
An error beep will sound and a zone trouble message will display on the keypad advising the user to seal the zone(s) or to bypass them before the area will arm.
If this option is disabled the zone will not be tested during the arming sequence and the system will arm. If the zone(s) are unsealled at the end of exit time a Zone
Trouble report will be sent.
3) Use the [] and [] keys to highlight which channel
you want to learn the RF device input (external/ internal contact), then press [OK] to select.
Both channel 1 and channel 2 can only be utilised by Bosch 3401E and 3405E sensors, allowing you to utilise both internal and external contacts from the same device on different zones. All other bosch RF sensors can only use channel 1.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
If you require to change a channel, you need to first
delete the RF device ID (see MENU 3-3-1) and add the
RF device again.
7-11
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Inputs > RF Zone >
Delete RF Device
MENU 3-3-1
G LO B A L I N P U T O P T I O N S
Inputs > Global Input Options >
EOL Value
This menu allows you to delete an RF device .
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone in the list and press[OK]. The keypad will only list zones that have an ID programmed. If no zones have an ID number programmed, the keypad will display:
No Matching List Items
Found!
Press OK or MENU
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - No EOL
01 - 1k0 Ohm
02 - 1k5 Ohm
03 - 2k2 Ohm
04 - 2k7 Ohm
05 - 3k3 Ohm
06 - 4k7 Ohm
07 - 5k6 Ohm
MENU 3-4-0
0 5
08 - 6k8 Ohm
09 - 8k1 Ohm
10 - 10k Ohm
11 - 6K8 Alarm + 2k2 Tamp
12 - 10k Alarm + 10k Tamp
13 - 22k Ohm
14 - 3k3 Alarm + 6k8 Tamp
15 - Split EOL 3k3 //6k8
Delete Device ID Zn1
Zone 1 Name
007407097
Press OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to DELETE the RF device and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without deleting.
Inputs > RF Zone >
Test RF Device
MENU 3-3-2
This menu allows you to test just how good the current position is for an RF device. Enter the command and you will be presented with a list of RF zones in the current area that are available for test. Use the arrow keys to highlight the zone to test and press OK. At any time press menu to exit.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [3] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to test in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press [OK]. The system will only list RF zones in the current area.
This menu programs the End Of Line resistor (EOL) value that is global for all hard-wired zones including zones on the Zone Expander Module. Only one EOL Value can be programmed.
Setting the EOL Value to type 0 to 14 will configure the control panel as 8 hardwired zones. Additional zones via optional zone expander boards will start on zone 9.
Setting the EOL as type 15 will configure the control panel as 16 hardware zones with zones 17 upwards via optional zone expander boards.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current EOL value (Default = 5).
EOL Value
05 - 3k3 Ohm
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the EOL
Value you want to use then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
W a i t i n g for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Keyswitch Options
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 3-4-1
0 0
2) Once a signal is received the following information
will be displayed.
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Transmissions = 001
Signal = Good
Press OK or MENU
00 - Latching All On/Off
01 - Latching All On
02 - Latch Part On/Off
03 - Latching Part On
04 - Latching Off
05 - Pulse All On/Off
06 - Pulse All On
07 - Pulse Part On/Off
08 - Pulse Part On
09 - Pulse Part Off
Signal can = Good, Average or Relocate
Every time you send a transmission, the number of transmissions will increment and the average of the signals with be displayed. Be sure to send a few transmissions to establish a more accurate signal measurement.
This menu programs the properties for any zone in the system programmed as a keyswitch zone. Only one option can be selected for the entire system which means that all keyswitches fitted will behave the same way.
The system can send Open and Close reports based on the keyswitch operation with the zone number representing the user number in the report.
7-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current keyswitch options (Default = 0
Disabled).
Keyswitch Options
00 - Latching All On/Off
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Keyswitch Open Close
This feature allows you to select whether or not a zone programmed as a Keyswitch Zone, will send opening and closing reports. The default is set to Off.
Alarm On Tamper
This option allows tamper circuits on RF sensors and hardwire zones to sound an alarm when faulted when their corresponding area is turned off (disarmed).
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the required
keyswitch option then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Inputs > Global Input Options >
Input Options
1 Tamper On Short
2 Reserved
3 Response Time 500msec
4 Reserved
5 Keyswitch Open Close
6 Alarm On Tamper
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 3-4-2
This menu programs the various global input options which will effect all zones on the system.
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current input options.
Tamper On Short
Reserved
Response Time 500msec
Press OK ON OFF MENU
Inputs > PGM Input >
Input Type
MENU 3-5-0
0 0
00 - Disabled
01 - Latching On/Off
02 - Pulse On/Off
03 - Simple RF On/Off
04 - Bosch Serial Rcvr
05 - Crow Serial Rcvr (TBA)
This menu option is used to configure the systems programmable input terminal. Various devices can be connected including keyswitches of radio controlled relays etc. When RF zones are required you need to connect the
RF receiver to this input
Connect keyswitch between Input terminal and GND.
See Wiring Diagrams in Section 3 for various connection diagrams.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current input type (Default = 0
Disabled).
Input Type
00 - Disabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Tamper On Short
Setting this option will cause any Zone which become shorted to report a tamper alarm condition for the zone.
Response Time 500msec
Setting this option will increase the response time for all zones to 500ms.
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the required
Input Device Type then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
The Latching and Momentary On/Off modes
are active low, and when triggered, they will automatically force arm the area.
7-13
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Inputs > Tamper Inputs >
Tamper Options
1 Display Panel Tpr
2 Report Panel Tpr
3 Audible Panel Tpr
4 Display Expander Tpr
5 Report Expander Tpr
6 Audible Expander Tpr
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 3-6-0
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
This menu programs how the various system tamper inputs behave when faulted. These dedicated tamper inputs are active 24 hours a day when enabled.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current tamper options.
Display Panel Tpr
Report Panel Tpr
Audible Panel Tpr
Press OK ON OFF MENU
I N P U T T E S T I N G
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test All Zones
-
-
MENU 3-9-0
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the same time. To perform a successfull walk test, each zone in the area must be sealed and unsealed. Users must have access to the area they want to test.
Once the mode is activated all zones in the area will be listed one after the other on the keypad display. As each zone is successfully tested it will be removed from the list leaving only those zone still to be tested in the list.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [0] and select the area to
walk test from the list then press [OK].
2) The keypad will begin scrolling all of the zones that
are to be tested as per the below display.
To test zone Zn1 open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a trouble condition when the tamper circuit that monitors the systems cabinet is faulted. The trouble condition will clear when the tamper circuit has restored.
To test zone Zn2 open then close
Zone 2 Name
Press OK or MENU
3) Open and close each zone in the list. Zones that
have been successfully tested are removed from the keypad scroll list. When all zones have been tested, the keypad will display:
All zones have been sucessfully tested
Report Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Cabinet
Tamper report when the cabinet tamper circuit is faulted.
A Cabinet Tamper Restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit has restored.
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Audible Cabinet Tpr
Setting this option will cause the panel to sound the sirens when the cabinet tamper circuit is faulted.
Display Expander Tpr
Setting this option causes the system to display tamper events which have occured on peripheral modules.
Report Expander Tpr
Setting this option enables peripheral tamper reporting.
Audible Expander Tpr
Setting this option causes the system to trigger an audible alarm when a peripheral tamper is triggered.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Walk Test A Zone
-
-
MENU 3-9-1
This menu allows you to select a single zone to be walk tested. To perform a successfull walk test, the sellected zone must be sealled and unsealled. Users must have access to the zone they want to test.
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the zone you want to walk test in the list and press[OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the zone number directly and press
[OK].
2) The keypad will display the zone to be tested.
7-14 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
To test zone Zn1 open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
3) Open and close the zone that needs to be tested.
When the test has been completed the keypad will display:
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Test Successful
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Inputs > Input Testing >
Sensor Watch Time
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 3-9-2
0 3 0
Days
This menu programs the Sensor Watch Time interval.
Zones programmed for Sensor Watch are required to seal and unseal at least once within the Sensor Watch Time period or a trouble message will be displayed on the keypad and a Zone Trouble report sent.
Valid entries are 001 -255 Days and 000 = Sensor Watch
Disabled
1) Press [MENU] + [3] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current sensor watch time (Default = 30 days).
Sensor Watch Time
030 Days
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new Sensor
Watch time in days then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Sensor Watch monitoring is only active when the
area is in the disarmed state. 24 hour zone types cannot be monitored using the Sensor Watch feature.
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
7-15
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Input Programming
This page left intentionally blank
7-16 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 8
Output Programming
T he Solution 6000 is capable of controlling up to 16 outputs. The first 4 outputs are on the main control board and an additional 4 outputs are provided using an output expander module. Each output can have its own unique name up to 16 characters to identify it on the system for display and reporting purposes.
Under the commands menu you are able to view the status of any output and to change its on/off condition. In the case of latching output types, you will be required to reset the output manually using these commands.
Outputs are programmed using an event type. First select the event type that will cause the output to trigger. Then select the polarity of the event, if it is low and goes high or high and goes low. If the event is pulsing or one shot type, the time parameter must also be programmed to define the time of the pulse.
Event Assignment, this is extremely important parameter and has a different meaning depending on the event type selected. For example, event type “24 - Area Part On” the event assignment selects the Area that is armed in part on for the output to trigger. If you set the event assignment to 1, then it will correspond to area 1 and so on, setting it to zero means all areas. See the event type table for more detail on the relationship of event type to event assignment.
Outputs 1 and 2 are special outputs that can be configured as horn speaker polarity types and are monitored to report a device connection trouble. Output 4 is a dry relay contact which has a optional jumper that allows you to switch positive or negative without the need to add additional wiring.
The outputs are all protected and will shut down individually under overload conditions. A report will be generated and a displayed on the keypad to indicate the trouble condition.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [0] and select the output
you want to view from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number that you want to view then press [OK].
The keypad will display the following when the output is currently in the OFF state and ready to activate.
External Siren Op1
Is OFF and Ready
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the output is currently in the OFF state but the connection is missing.
External Siren Op1
Is OFF and Ready
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the output is currently in the ON state and ready.
External Siren Op1
Is ON and TIMING
Triggered
Press OK or MENU
The keypad will display the following when the output is currently in the ON state but the connection is missing.
External Siren Op1
Is ON and TIMING
Connection Trouble
Press OK or MENU
O U T P U T CO M M A N D S
Outputs > Commands >
Output Status
-
-
-
MENU 4-0-0
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
This command allows you to view the current status of any system output.
8-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Outputs > Commands >
Turn Output On/Off
-
-
MENU 4-0-1
This command allows you to manuallly turn any output
ON or OFF. Outputs can be configured to control various functions including outside lighting, pool pumps, watering systems, air conditioners etc.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [1] and select the output
you want to operate from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2) The keypad will display the following when the
output is off. To turn the Output On, press [ON]. To override any time parameters that the output has set, press and hold the [ON] key.
External Siren Op1
Output is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
3) The keypad will display the following when the
output is on. To turn the output Off, press [OFF].
External Siren Op1
Output is ON,
To turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
In the above example screen,
N = Outputs 01 to 05 are Normal (Off)
F = Output 10 has a Fault (Overload)
T = Output 09 is Triggered (On)
- = Outputs 05 to 08 and Outputs 11 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
3) The keypad will display the following output array
information for outputs 17 to 32.
1112222222222333
7890123456789012
----------------
Press OK or MENU
4) The keypad will display the following output array
information for output 33 to 40.
3333333444444444
3456789012345678
--------
Press OK or MENU
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Outputs > Commands >
Door Status
-
MENU 4-0-3
This menu allows you to view the status of a selected door.
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [3].
2) A list of available doors will display on the keypad.
Outputs > Commands >
Output Array
-
MENU 4-0-2
Dr1 Front Door
Dr2 Computer Room
Dr3 Warehouse Door
Press , OK or MENU
This menu allows the master user and installer to view output status in groups of 16. Outputs will continuously be updated during the display so that real time status can be seen. The top two rows of the display show the output number, the third row displays the output status
N = NORMAL - Off Condition
T = TRIGGERED - On Condition
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the door that you
want to check the status of, then press [OK] to select. Alternatively, you can enter the door number then press [OK].
The keypad will display the following:
F = FAULT - Overload Condition
- = DISABLED
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to select the output group to view.
2) Use the up and down arrows at any time to move to
a new group. The keypad will display the following output array information for outputs 1 to 16.
Front Door Dr1
Locked
< Door Related Information >
Press OK or MENU
8-2
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
NNNNN---TF------
Press OK or MENU
4) The following door states can be displayed in the
door status menu.
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked By TimeZone
Open
Forced Open
Open Too Long
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Unlocked - Fire
5) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Dr1 Door 1 Name
Dr2 Door 2 Name
Dr3 Door 3 Name
Press
OK or MENU
Outputs > Commands >
Door Array
-
MENU 4-0-4
This menu allows the master user and installer to view door status of the doors in groups of 16. Doors will continuously be updated during the display so that real time status can be seen. The top two rows of the display show the door number, the third row displays the door status
L = Door Locked
U = Door Unlocked
O = Door Open
- = Disabled or Not Available
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to select the door group to view. The keypad will display the following output array information for outputs 1 to 16.
3) Use the arrow keys to highlight the door control
option required, then press [OK]. To abort press
[MENU].
Operate
Lock
Unlock
Press
OK or MENU
Selecting the operate function will operate the door for the programmed lock time only and then the door will return to it’s resting state.
Selecting the Lock or Unlock functions will for the door to change state and remain in that state until a master user changes the lock condition of the door back to the normal state, or until a timezone linked to the door triggers.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
LLLLL---UUUUO---
Press OK or MENU
O U T P U T P R O P E R T I E S
Outputs > Properties >
Output Name
O u t p u t 1 N a m e
-
MENU 4-1-0
This menu allows you to program the name for each output. Output names can be up to 16 characters long.
In the above example screen,
L = Doors 01 to 05 are Locked
O = Door 13 is Open
U = Doors 09 to 12 area Unlocked
- = Doors 06 to 08 and Doors 14 to 16 are Disabled or
Not Available
2) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Output in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the output number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Output Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
Output Name Op1
Outputs > Commands >
Door Control
-
MENU 4-0-5
External Siren
Press OK to SAVE
This menu allows you to operate the door, lock the door or unlock the door.
The first step is to select the door which you wish to control keeping in mind that you will only be presented with a list of doors that you are authorised to control and secondly, that you are a master user.
i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [0] + [5].
2) Use the arrow keys to highlight the door you wish
to override, then press [OK].
8-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Outputs > Properties >
Event Type
MENU 4-1-1
0 0 0
This menu allows you to set the output event type. See the
Output Event Type Table and Event Type Descriptions in this section for more information on the available options.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Output in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Event
Type required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. It is also possible to directly enter the Event Type number then press [OK].
Event Type Op1
05 – 3rd Dial Attempt
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel has made 3 unsuccessful call attempts to the base station. The output will reset when all pending messages have been sent or when the maximum number of call attempts have been made.
06 – Dest Reporting
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel is communicating via Destination 1,
Destination 2 or Destination 3 (Email) and will reset when the transmission ends.
07 – Reserved
08 – Dest Kiss Off
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel receives an kiss-off acknowledgment from the receiving party while communicating via destination 1 or 2. It is recommended that this output is programmed with a one-shot timer.
36 - External Audible
Press 0-9 OK to Save
01 - Battery Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects a low or missing stand-by battery and will reset once a successful battery test has been performed.
Battery tests are performed automatically every 4 hours and when the system is armed. A manual test can also be requested at any time while the system is disarmed. See
MENU 7-9-1 — Battery Test
09 – User Keyfob Func 1
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key X is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is user specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
i
Note
In previous versions, programming an output with
event type 09 - Keyfob Function 1 to follow the keyfob for user 255 would cause the control panel to restart.
This is only an issue for user 255. In version 2.14, this has been corrected.
10 – User Keyfob Func 2
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key Y is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is user specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
02 – AC Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that the AC mains power has been missing for 1 minute and will reset when the power has been restored for 1 minute.
03 – Telco Line Fail
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that the telco line has been disconnected for 30 seconds and will reset when the line has been restored.
04 – Comm Fail
This event type will cause the output to operate if the panel fails to report to destination1 or 2 or both. The panel will try to send the report as many times as set in the call attempt counter before registering a comm fail.
The output will restore as soon as a successful report has been sent to the destination that has previously failed to report. If both Destination 1 and Destination 2 had failed to report then successful report to both destinations will need to be made before the output will reset. See MENU
5-2-0 — Call Attempt Count
12 – Output Device Missing
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that a horn speaker is missing. The output will reset when the horn speaker is reconnected.
Only output 1 and 2 can be programmed as a horn speaker outputs. See MENU 4-1-3 — Output Polarity for information on configuring an output to drive a horn speaker
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I 8-4 i
Note
In previous versions, programming an output with
event type 10 - Keyfob Function 2 to follow the keyfob for user 255 would cause the control panel to restart.
This is only an issue for user 255. In version 2.14, this has been corrected.
11 – Dialler Disabled
This event type will cause the output to operate if the panel reporting functions are manually disabled and will reset when reporting is enabled. See MENU 5-2-1 —
Dialer Options.
13 – Output Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that an output device is missing or in an overload condition. The output will reset when all failed outputs have restored or the overload condition has been removed.
14 – Panel On Line
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel seizes the phone line and will reset when the phone line is released.
15 – Incoming Call
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects an incoming call on the phone line and will reset when the ring signal stops.
16 – System Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects a system trouble condition and will reset when the condition is cleared.
17 – Box Tamper
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that the onboard cabinet tamper circuit is open. The output will reset when the tamper circuit is closed. No EOL resistor is required on this input.
18 – Zone Trouble
This event type will cause the output to operate when the panel detects that a zone has a trouble condition and will reset when the trouble condition has cleared.
19 – Zone Mirror
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific zone is open or unsealed and will reset when the zone closes.
See MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on how to set the zone to mirror.
20 – Zone Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific zone has triggered an alarm and will reset when the corresponding area is disarmed. For a non 24hour zone to trigger an alarm the area must be armed. See
MENU 4-1-2 — Event Assignment for infomation on how to set the zone to monitor.
21 – Area Disarmed
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as the corresponding area is disarmed and will reset when the area is armed in either the All On or Part On modes.
If the output event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then all areas must be disarmed for the output to operate. The output will reset as soon as any area is armed in either the All On or Part On modes.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
22 – Area Part Or All On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the selected area is armed in either All On or Part On mode. The output will reset when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas) then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in All On or Part On mode. The output will reset as soon any area is disarmed.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
8-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
23 – Area All On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a specific area is armed All On mode and will reset when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in the All On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
24 – Area Part On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a specific area is armed Part On mode and will reset when the area is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in the Part On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
25 – Area Part 2 On
This event type will cause the output to operate as soon as a specific area is armed Part 2 On mode and will reset when the ares is disarmed.
If the event assignment for this output has been set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate when all areas have been armed in the Part 2 On mode and will reset as soon as any area is disarmed.
26 – Entry Timing
This event type will cause the output to operate while either Entry Timer 1, Entry Timer 2 or the Part Mode Entry
Timer is active. The output will reset when the entry timer expires or the corresponding area is disarmed.
27 – Exit Timing
This event type will cause the output to operate while
Exit Timer is active. The output will reset when the exit timer expires or the corresponding area is disarmed.
28 – End Of Exit Time
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Exit Time expires and will reset when the corresponding area is disarmed.
29 – Chime On
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Chime Mode is activated and will reset when Chime
Mode is turned off.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then the output will operate as soon as Chime
Mode is activated in any area and will reset when Chime
Mode is turned off in all areas.
30 - Chime Zone Trigger
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific Chime Zone is triggered and reset when the
Chime Zone reseals.
8-6
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then the output will operate as soon as any chime zone is triggered provided that Chime Mode is on in those areas. The output will reset when all Chime Zones are resealed. For this event type to work Chime Mode must be turned on. See MENU 2-0-5 — Chime On/Off i
Note
It also allows the output to reset when chime mode
is turned off by the user even if the chime zone is still faulted. It also allows if one or more chime zones remain faulted after the one shot timer has expired, the output programmed for chime will operate or retrigger if another chime zone becomes faulted.
31 – Auto Arm Pre Alert
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Auto Arm Pre-Alert Timer is active and will reset when the Pre-Alert Timer expires or a valid user code is entered.
i
Note
The output will also reset when the auto arm pre-
alert time has been delayed by by the user .
32 – Ready To Arm All On
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is disarmed and all zones in the area are sealled.
The output will reset when the area is armed or when a zone becomes unsealed.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all zones are sealed. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any zone becomes unsealed.
33 – Ready To Part Arm
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is disarmed and all zones in the area which are to be monitored in Part On mode are sealed. The output will reset when the area is armed or when a Part On zone becomes unsealled.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all Part On zones are sealed. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any Part On zone becomes unsealed.
34 – Ready To Part 2 Arm
This event type will cause the output to operate when the area is disarmed and all zones in the area which are to be monitored in Part 2 On mode are sealled. The output will reset when the area is armed or when a Part 2
On zone becomes unsealed.
If the event assignment for this output is set to zero (all areas), then the output will only operate if all areas are disarmed and all Part 2 On zones are sealed. The output will reset if any area is armed or if any Part 2 On zone becomes unsealed.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
35 – Close Sent OK
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Closing report has been acknowledged (Kissed-Off) by the control room receiver. The output will reset when the area is disarmed. If the output has been assigned to multiple areas then it will only reset when all areas have been disarmed.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
In version 2.19, the output will now operate multiple times when both audible and silent zone alarms occur.
39 – Fire Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible fire zone or keypad emergency fire alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
36 – External Audible
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
This event type will also generate speaker beeps when the system or area is armed via a RF Keyfob, the
Programmable Input Terminal or Keyswitch zone.
1 beep when the area is disarmed
2 beeps when the area is armed All On
3 beeps when the area is armed Part On
40 – Burglary Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible burglary alarm (including keypad emergency panic, medical and tamper alarm) occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
41 – Silent Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when any silent alarm occurs (including silent fire and silent keypad emergency alarms). The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
i
Note
Changes in version 2.19 have improved the frequency
reange and volume of the the speaker bee alerts.
42 – Duress Alarm
This event type will cause the output to operate when a user initiates a Duress alarm. i
Note
Some of the newer combo siren modules being
supplied in many siren kits are actually using speakers with an impedance of 6-7 ohms instead of the traditional 8 ohms. When these speakers are wired in parellel on the same output, the speakers may sound intermittently due to the output overload sensor being triggered.
43 – Keypad Medical
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or audible medical alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
Version 2.19 firmware now includes changes to reduce a two speaker load from averageing 1A to
800mA and the output overload filter timer has been extended to 60 seconds for overload conditions.
To initiate a medical emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press and hold the [7] and [9] keys for 2 seconds.
37 – Internal Audible
This event type will cause the output to operate when any audible alarm occurs. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed. No speaker beeps are generated for this event type.
44 – Keypad Fire
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or audible fire alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
To initiate a fire emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press and and hold the [4] and [6] keys for 2 seconds.
38 – Any Zone Alarm
This output type follows both silent and audible zone alarms including the following audible alarms:
Panel Tamper, PIN Retry Limit, Output Missing, Keyfob
Panic, Module Tamper, Phone Line Fail, RF Receiver
Tamper/Missing/Jamming, Keypad Panic or Keypad
Medical emergency, Keypad/LAN Reader Tamper and
Door Forced events.
45 – Keypad Panic
This event type will cause the output to operate when a silent or audible panic alarm has been initiated from the keypad. The output will reset when the system or area is disarmed.
To initiate a panic emergency via the keypad, simultaneously press and hold [1] and [3] keys.
i
Note
In previous versions, when a silent zone had
registered an alarm condition, the output would operate, however, a second alarm during the same arming cycle may fail to operate the otuptu again for both audible and silent alarm events.
46 – Device Tamper
This event type will cause the output to operate when the tamper circuit on the rear of the keypad is triggered.
The output will reset when a valid user PIN is entered.
8-7
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
47 – Access Denied
This event type will trigger if you attempt to enter an incorrect code more times than programmed in the pin retry count location. The event assignment will be the area number for this event type.
48 – Strobe
This event type is used to operate a stobe warning light.
The output can be made to operate when any of the following events occur. At leaset one strobe event must be selected for this output type to operate. See MENU
2-1-5 — Strobe Trigger option.
Strobe trigger options include:
= Audible Burglary Alarm
= Silent Burglary Alarm
= Fire Alarm
= Arm/Disarm Flash Via RF Keyfob
= Arm/Disarm Flash Via Keyswitch or PGM Input
= 24-Hour Alarm
49 – Smoke Sensor GND
This output is used to allow smoke detectors to be automatically reset when the system is disarmed. You should connect the GND terminal of all smoke detectors in the system to outputs which are set to this event type.
For this output type to perform correctly you should program the output polarity as type 11 - Normally
Low One Shot Open and program the output time parameter to be 5 seconds. The smoke sensor needs to be connected to a zone input programmed as fire.
If fire alarm verification is required, we recommend that you program the zone pulse count tor 2 pulses and the pulse count time to 90 seconds for each fire zone.
50 – Sensor Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when a zone sensor watch fault has occured. The output will reset when the system or area in armed. See MENU 3-1-
8 — Zone Options in Section 7 - Input Programming for more information on Sensor Watch.
51 – Senior Watch
This event type will cause the output to operate when a Senior Watch fault has occured. See MENU 2-1-2 —
Input Options in Section 6 - Area Programming for more information on Senior Watch.
52 – Exit Error
This event type will cause the output to operate when a
Entry/Exit Delay zone becomes unsealed during exit time and remains unsealed when the exit time expires. The output will reset when the system is disarmed.
53 – Keyfob Function 1
This event type will cause the output to operate when
8-8
Key X is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is area specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
54 – Keyfob Function 2
This event type will cause the output to operate when
Key Y is pressed on the Keyfob. This output type is area specific and requires a 4 button keyfob.
55 – Output In PreDelay
This event type will cause the output to operate when a pre-delay timer is active on a different output set with a polarity type of 01 (Normally Open, Going Low With Pre
Delay) or polarity type 08 (Normally Low, Going Open
With Pre Delay).
56 – Follow PIN Code
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specified user PIN is entered via the keypad or when the corresponding user’s keyfob or token is used.
You should program the User whose PIN is to be followed into the Event Assignment for this output.
57 – Part Entry Time
This event type will cause the output to operate when the Part Entry timer is active and will reset when Part
Entry time expires.
58 – TimeZones
This event type will cause the output to operate when a specific time zone occurs. The output event assignment programs which time zone to follow. i
Note
In previous versions, an output programmed to
follow any timezone (i.e. Event Type = 58 - TimeZone and Event Assignment = 00 - Any TimeZone), would fail to operate when any timezone period triggered.
In version 2.14, this has been corrected so that the output will now trigger correctly when any period for timezones 2 to 16 is triggered.
i
Note
In previous versions, an output programmed to follow a timezone with the Block If All On option set in MENU 4-1-5, would continue to operate even when any area was turned All On.
In version 2.14, this has been corrected so that the output will not operate when any area has been turned All On if Option 7 - Block If All On is set in
MENU 4-1-5.
59 – Temperature Hi/Lo
This event type will cause the output to operate when the keypad temperature increases above the maximum or falls below the minimum set temperature. The output will reset when the temperature reads between the maximum and minimum values.
See MENU 7-7-3 — Keypad Hi/Lo Temp in Section 11 -
System Programming
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
60 – Door
This event type will cause the output to operate when a user assigned to the same door swipes their token. The prox reader must be assigned to the same door group as the output and user.
The Event Assignment is the Door Assignment Number.
61 - Door Open Too Long
This output will turn on when the control panel has detected that the zone assigned to the door has not returned to normal before the end of the door open too long time.
69 - User Control
This event type allows users to control an output using the iFob Control App.
i
.
Note
New Output Event Type in version 2.24 and higher
70 - User Panic
The output will turn on when a user initiates a keyfob panic emergency. The output will turn off when the area has been turned All On or the output time parmeter has finished.
71 - CLI Trigger
The output will turn on when the control panel has detected an incoming call with a telephone number programmed in Trigger Table 1 or Trigger Table 2.
i
Note
Outputs configured to follow telephone numbers programmed in the CLI Trigger Table 2, (MENU 6-5-
5-1) would fail to operate if any of the CLI trigger telephone numbers call the GSM module. In version
2.14, this has been fixed.
71 - GSM Signal Lost
The output is triggered whenever the radio is not registered on the GSM network and restores automatically on exiting programming mode or when the radio resumes its connection with the network.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Outputs > Properties >
Event Assignment
MENU 4-1-2
0 0 0
(A) =
Area Assignment
Assign to Area 1 to 8 (0 = Any Area)
(P) = Control Panel
(O) =
Output Assignment
Assign to Output 1 to 40 (0 = Any Output)
(Z) =
Zone Assignment
Assign to Zone 1 to 144 (0 = Any Zone)
(U) =
User Assignment
Assign to User 1 to 255 (0 = Any User)
(TZ) =
TimeZone Assignment
Assign to TimeZone 1 to 16 (0 = Any TimeZone)
(Dr) =
Door Assignment
(Assign to Door 1 to 16 (0 = Any Door)
(K) =
Keypad Assignment
Assign to Keypad/LAN Reader 1 to 16 (0 = Any Keypad/
LAN Reader)
(T) =
CLI Table Assignment
Assign to CLI Table 1 to 2 (0 = Any CLI Table)
(D) =
Reporting Destination Assignment
Assign to Destination 1 or 2 (0 = Any Destination)
(CLI)
CLI Trigger Table
Assign to CLI Trigger Table 1 or 2 (0 = Both Tables)
(Mac)
Macro
Assign to Macro
This menu allows you to assign the output event to an individual area, user, zone or door etc. Programming a zero will assign the output event to follow any area, user, zone or door etc depending on the event type.
Refer to Output Event Type Table for a complete listing of available options.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [2] and select the output
you want to operate from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number then press [OK]. The keypad will display the current Event Assignment.
Event Assignment Op1
00 - All Areas
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
73 - GPRS Failure
The output is triggered when communication to the GPRS network is lost and data can no longer be transferred between the radio and the APN (Access Point
Name). It restores automatically on exiting programming mode or once data transmission resumes between the radio and the APN.
74 - Ethernet Fail
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Output Event Assignment then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
8-9
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Outputs > Properties >
Output Polarity
MENU 4-1-3
0 0
00 - Open To Low
01 - Open To Low + Pre
02 - Open Latching Low
08 - Low To Open + Pre
09 - Low Latching Open
10 - Low Pulsing Open
03 - Open Pulsing Low
04 - Open 1 Shot Low
11 - Low 1 Shot Open
12 - 1 Shot Open+Retrigger
05 - 1 Shot Low+Retrigger 13 - 1 Shot Open + Reset
06 - 1 Shot Low + Reset 14 - Speaker Output
07 - Low To Open 15 - Toggle
The output polarity programs how the output will operate.
Only one option (0 – 15) can be programmed per output.
See the Output Polarity description for more detailled information.
Open 1 Shot Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event occurs. The output will only reset when the time specified in the Time Parameter expires.
The output will run for the full duration and cannot be manually reset.
1 Shot Low+Retrigger
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event occurs. The output will retrigger each time the event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot time has expired.
This polarity is ideally suited for security lighting control.
A sensor can be used to trigger an output event and then each time the sensor triggers, the output will operate.
The light will turn off when the one shot timer expires.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the output in the list and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current output polarity.
Output Polarity Op1
1 Shot Low + Reset
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to GND when the event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot timer expires or when the event has restored.
This means the operation of the output can be shortened based on the event and or the programmed time parameter.
14 - Speaker Output
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Output Polarity required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Low To Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Time parameters do not apply to this polarity type.
Low To Open + Pre
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs provided the time parameter has expired. The output will reset when the output event restores. Time parameters will only set the Pre Delay when this polarity is selected.
Open To Low
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Time parameters do not apply to this polarity type.
Open To Low + Pre
Output is normally open circuit and switches to GND when the event occurs provided the time parameter has expired. The output will reset when the output event restores. Time parameters will only set the Pre Delay when this polarity is selected.
Open Latching Low
Output is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs. The output can only be reset manually using the Output Command Menu.
Open Pulsing Low
Output is normally open circuit and will pulse LOW when the event occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Use the Time Parameter to set the pulse duration.
8-10 i
Note
In version 2.04 this output has been corrected. In
previous versions, this output polarity would fail to operate when the time parameter is set as zero (ie. No pre-delay time).
Low Latching Open
Output is normally GND and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output can only be reset maually usning the output Command Menu.
Low Pulsing Open
Output is normally LOW and will pulse OPEN when the event occurs. The output will reset when the output event restores. Use the Time Parameter to set the pulse duration.
Low 1 Shot Open
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output will only reset when the time specified in the Time Parameter expires.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
The output will run for the full duration and cannot be manually reset.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming operate. For Example you may want a strobe output to operate for 1 hour, Either of the examples below will achieve the 1 hour time.
1 Shot Open+Retrigger
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output will retrigger each time the event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot time has expired.
Total Time Hour Minute Seconds 10th Sec
1 Shot Open + Reset
Output is normally LOW and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output will reset when the one shot timer expires or the event has restored. This means the operation of the output can be shortened based on the event and or the programmed time parameter.
60 Minutes
60 Minutes
001
000
000
060
000
000
Table 22: Example - Output One Shot Timer
000
000
Pulsing Mode
The time base is the unit of time that the output will pulse on and off. If the time base is programmed for 60 seconds, the output will pulse on for 60 seconds and then off for 60 seconds (repeat) until the output is reset.
Speaker Output
This polarity can only be used for Output 1 and Output 2 when a horn speaker has been connected.
Toggle
This polarity allows the output to turn on when the event occurs. The output will toggle off when the event occurs again. This polarity does not follow any time parameters.
T I M E D O U T P U TS
Outputs > Properties >
Output Options
1 Off On Low Battery
2 Guest Control
3 Reserved
4 Monitor Overload
5 Monitor Device Fail
6 Alarm On Device Fail
7 Block If All On
8 Show Status On Keypad
MENU 4-1-5
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Outputs > Properties >
Time Parameter
0 0 0
Hour
0 0 0
Minute
0 0 0
Seconds
MENU 4-1-4
0 0 0
10 th
Sec
The time base parameter is only applicable for output types that are programmed as one shot or pulsing.
Program 0 to 255 for each of the units (Hour, Minute,
Seconds and 10th of a Second) for the time parameter. If required, add the units together to give the total one shot time or pulsing on/off time.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [5] and select the output
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Off On Low Battery
Guest Control
Reserved
Press OK ON OFF MENU
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [1] + [4] and select the output
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the output number then press [OK].
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the length of time for
each parameter. If required, use the [
←] and [→]
keys to move the cursor left and right between each time parameter.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Output Timing Op1
Hrs Mins Sec Tenth
000 005 000 000
Press OK to SAVE
Off On Low Battery
This option forces the control panel not to operate the output when a low battery or missing battery condition is in effect. Once the low battery condition restores, the output will return to normal operation.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
One Shot Mode
The time base is the length of time that the output will
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
8-11
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Guest Control
Guest control when enabled allows the output to be controlled from the quick select menu on the keypad which is a simple pull down menu. This allows you to view and alter the state of the output without the need of a PIN. To simply turn on or off guest control outputs, press the [
←] key.
Monitor Overload
Monitor Overload when selected will monitor the output for an overload condition and display as well as report if an overload condition occurs. The event will always be logged regardless if enabled or not.
Monitor Device Fail
Monitor device fail when selected will monitor the output for a disconnection condition and display as well as report when a disconnection occurs.
Alarm On Device Fail
This option causes the panel to sound an alarm when the output device becomes missing (armed or disarmed state).
Block If All On
This option prevents the output from turning on when the corresponding area is turned All On. When the area is off, Part On or Part 2 On, the output can again operate when the output event occurs.
Show Status On Keypad
This option allows the keypad to display the output that is currently active on the keypad.
Outputs > Properties >
Macro Group
Reserved
MENU 4-1-6
D O O R CO N T R O L
Outputs > Door Properties >
Door Name
D o o r 1 N a m e
-
MENU 4-2-0
This menu allows you to program the name for each output. Door names can be up to 20 characters long.
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the door in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the door number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the door name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line. .
Door Name Dr1
i
Note
Door 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Outputs > Door Properties >
Unlock TimeZone
MENU 4-2-2
0 0
00 - Disabled
01 - 24 Hour TimeZone
02 - TimeZone 2 Name
03 - TimeZone 3 Name
04 - TimeZone 4 Name
05 - TimeZone 5 Name
06 - TimeZone 6 Name
07 - TimeZone 7 Name
08 - TimeZone 8 Name
09 - TimeZone 9 Name
10 - TimeZone 10 Name
11 - TimeZone 11 Name
12 - TimeZone 12 Name
13 - TimeZone 13 Name
14 - TimeZone 14 Name
15 - TimeZone 15 Name
16 - TimeZone 16 Name
The unlock timezone is used to control the output which is assigned to operate the door lock. When the timezone is true, the output assigned to the corresponding door will be activated. Options area provided to stop the door from automatically operating if an area is armed or no users on site. The list of doors will appear, move the cursor over the door you wish to select and press the OK key.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [2]. The list of doors will
appear, move the cursor over the door you wish to select and press the [OK] key.
Unlock TimeZone Dr1
00 - Disabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
8-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
2) Use the arrow or number keys to select the time
zone that you want the door to follow, then press
[OK] to save and exit.
Outputs > Door Properties >
Door Options
1 Hold Off If Area Armed
2 Hold Off Auto Unlock
3 Reserved
4 Report Door Forced
5 Alarm On Door Forced
6 Report DOTL
7 Alarm On DOTL
8 Lift Door
MENU 4-2-3
1) Press [MENU] + [4] + [2] + [3] and select the door
you want to program from the list then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can directly enter the door number then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option, then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
Hold Off If Area Armed
Hold Off Auto Unlock
Release On Fire Alarm
Press OK ON OFF MENU
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Hold Off If Area Armed
This option when enabled and used in conjunction with a timezone assigned under the door control menu will stop the door from unlocking if the area behind the door is armed. This is very useful in cases where the holiday list may not have been kept up to date.
Hold Off Auto Unlock
Setting this option on a door will delay the automatic unlocking at the set time, until a valid credential is presented at a reader assigned to the door. Example: Dr1 is assigned to Tz2 (9am to 5pm) then 9am comes around and the door does not open. When a valid user presents their credential at 9.10am the door opens and stays held open until 5pm.
Report Door Forced
Setting this option allows the control panel to report door forced and door forced restore events. These events follow the Access Route set in MENU 1-6-0. It will also appear in the keypad display as an alarm condition identifying the door 'ALARM Door 1 Name'.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Alarm On Door Forced
This opion allows the control panel to sound an alarm when a door forced events occurs It will also appear in the keypad display as an alarm condition identifying the door 'ALARM Door 1 Name'. To silence this alarm, you must enter a valid PIN at the keypad.
Report DOTL
This option allows the control panel to report door open too long and door open too long restore events. These events follow the Access Route set in MENU 1-6-0.
i
Note
This option is new in version 2.16.
Alarm On DOTL
This option allows the control panel to sound an alarm when a door open too long event occurs.
i
Note
This option is new in version 2.16.
Lift Door
This option allows users to unlock multiple doors they have been assigned to at the same time using a token or fingerprint.
A user presenting their fingerprint or token to a reader that has both no door assignment (see MENU 6-1-7) and badging required (see MENU 6-1-4) will unlock all doors that has this option set.
i
Note
This option is new in version 2.16.
Example
A user has been assigned to 16 doors. A LAN reader has been assigned with no door assignment and also reader badging enabled. Setting doors 09 to 16 with Option 8
- Lift Door, will allow the user to present their credentials to unlock doors 09 to 16 at the same time.
If the same user presented their credentials at a reader that has been assigned to a single door, only that single door will unlock.
8-13
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
O U T P U T T E S T I N G
Outputs > Output Testing >
External Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-0
This menu allows you to test the operation of any output programmed as event type 36 (External Audible) or Event
Type 36 (Fire Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [0] and select the area
you want to test the external sirens in from the list then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
Outputs > Output Testing >
Internal Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-1
This menu allows you to test any output programmed as event type 37 (Internal Audible) or event type 39 (Fire
Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [1] and select the area
you want to test the internal sirens in from the list then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 36 or 39 in
the chosen area will now operate. The keypad will display the following during the siren test.
External Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 37 or 39 in
the chosen area will now operate. The keypad will display the following during the siren test.
Internal Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
3) When the siren test is complete, the keypad will
display the following:
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
3) When the bell test is complete, the keypad will
display the testing complete message.
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] to exit.
4) Press [OK] to exit.
Outputs > Output Testing >
Strobe Test
-
MENU 4-9-2
This menu allows you to test the any outputs programmed as event type 48, Strobe light. This test is not timed and needs to be manually stopped when testing is completed.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [2] and select the area
you want to test the strobe lights in from the list then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
8-14
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 48 in the
chosen area will now operate. The keypad will display the following during the strobe test.
Strobe Activated. Will reset on exit
Press OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
3) Check and verify that the strobe lights are working
correctly then press [OK] to end the test.
Outputs > Output Testing >
Fire Siren Test
-
MENU 4-9-3
This menu allows you to test any output programmed as event type 39 (Fire Alarm) for 5 seconds.
1) Enter [MENU] + [4] + [9] + [3] and select the area
you want to test the internal sirens in from the list then press [OK].
A1 Security System
A2 Area 2 Name
A3 Area 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Any outputs programmed for event type 39 in the
chosen area will now operate. The keypad will display the following during the siren test.
Fire Audible Testing
Press any key to abort
Press OK or MENU
3) When the bell test is complete, the keypad will
display the testing complete message.
Testing Complete. Press
OK to continue
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] to exit.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
8-15
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
O U T P U T E V E N T T YP E TA B L E
00 - Disabled
01 - Battery Trouble
02 - AC Trouble
03 - Telco Line Fail
04 - Comm Fail
05 - 3rd Dial Attempt
06 - Dest Reporting
07 - Disabled
08 - Dest Kiss Off
09 - User Keyfob Func 1
10 - User Keyfob Func 2
11 - Dialler Disabled
12 - Output Device Missing
13 - Output Trouble
14 - Panel On Line
15 - Incoming Call
16 - System Trouble
17 - Box Tamper
18 - Zone Trouble
19 - Zone Mirror
20 - Zone Alarm
21 - Area Disarmed
22 - Area Part Or All On
23 - Area All On
24 - Area Part On
25 - Area Part 2 On
P
Rr
Rr
P
P
P
Rr
Rr
Ur
Ur
P
P
Op
P
P
P
Zn
Zn
Zn
A
A
A
A
A
A
26 - Entry Timing
27 - Exit Timing
28 - End Of Exit Time
29 - Chime On
30 - Chime Zone Trigger
31 - Auto Arm Pre Alert
32 - Ready To Arm All On
33 - Ready To Part Arm
34 - Ready To Part 2 Arm
35 - Close Sent OK
36 - External Audible
37 - Internal Audible
38 - Any Zone Alarm
39 - Fire Alarm
40 - Burglary Alarm
41 - Silent Alarm
42 - Duress Alarm
43 - Keypad Medical
44 - Keypad Fire
45 - Keypad Panic
46 - Device Tamper
47 - Access Denied
48 - Strobe
49 - Smoke Sensor GND
50 - Sensor Watch
51 - Senior Watch
(Ma) = Macro
(P) = Panel Event Assignment
(Ur) = User Event Assignment
(Kp) = Keypad
Legend:
(CLI) = CLI Trigger Table
(Op) = Output Event Assignment
(Tz) = TimeZone Event Assignment
(Rr) = Reporting Destination
Table 23: Output Event Types
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
52 - Exit Error
53 - Keyfob Function 1
54 - Keyfob Function 2
55 - Output In PreDelay
56 - Follow PIN Code
57 - Part Entry Time
58 - TimeZones
59 - Temperature Hi/Lo
60 - Door
61 - Door Open Too Long
69 - User Control
70 - User Panic
71 - CLI Trigger
72 - GSM Signal Lost
73 - GPRS Failure
74 - Ethernet Fail
75 - Macro
(A) = Area Event Assignment
(Zn) = Zone Event Assignment
(Dr) = Door Group Event Assignment
Ur
CLI
P
Dr
Dr
Ur
P
P
Ma
Op
Ur
A
A
A
A
Tz
Kp
8-16 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
O U T P U T A S S I G N M E N TS
Module
Number
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
Output Assignment
Address Setting
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Control Panel
Virtual Outputs
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF OFF
Output Number
1 to 5
6 to 8
9 to 12
13 to 16
17 to 20
21 to 24
25 to 28
29 to 32
33 to 36
37 to 40
Table 24: Address Configuration and Output Assignments
O U T P U T D E FAU LT TA B L E
The table below list the default values for all Output parameters in the Solution 6000. Outputs 1 to 4 are High current digital outputs and Output 5 is the onboard relay output. Outputs 9 to 40 are only available if the optional Output Relay
Expander Boards (CM710B) are fitted. Options marked N/A = Not Applicable.
Programming Option
Output Name
Event Type
Event Assignment
Output Polarity
Time Parameter
N° Of Hours
N° Of Minutes
N° Of Seconds
N° Of 1/10 Seconds
Output Options
Off On Low Battery
Guest Control
Reserved
Monitor Overload
Monitor Device Fail
Alarm On Device Fail
Block If All On
Show Status On Keypad
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
000
005
000
000
Output 1
External
Siren
36
(External
Siren)
0
14
Speaker
Output
Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 9 - 40
Strobe
Light
48
(Strobe)
0
6
1 Shot Low +
Reset
Smoke Sensor
PWR
49
(Smoke Sensor
GND)
0
11
Low 1 Shot
Open
Internal
Siren
37
(Internal
Siren)
0
6
1 Shot Low +
Reset
On Board
Relay
54
(Keyfob
Function 2)
0
4
Open 1 Shot
Low
Output x Name
00
(Not Used)
0
0
Open
To Low
008
000
000
000
000
000
010
000
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Table 28: Output Default Table
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
000
005
000
000
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
000
000
002
000
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
000
000
000
000
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
8-17
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Output Programming
This page left intentionally blank
8-18 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 9
Comms Programming
T he control panel has a built in dialler that connects directly to a standard PSTN telephone line. To program the dialler you must set the telephone number to dial and then the reporting format to send the information in.
The command menu allows you to set the Domestic
Numbers, initiate a Solution Link Upload / Download session, turn on/off call forwarding.
There are two independent reporting routes that define where a reportable event should be sent, by default all events will report through route 1. Reportable events in the system are categorised into Alarm, System, Emergency,
Open/Close and Test. This means that you are able to steer these different event categories to different report routes.
A report route is just like an independent dialler, it has its own primary and secondary telephone numbers and reporting format.
Example: Route 1 = CID, Route 2 = SMS
If you set the reporting route for Open/Close as Route 2 and all other events to Route 1, then all reports will be sent to route 1 in Contact ID format and then all open close reports will be sent through SMS. This is very handy if you want to monitor what time your children come home from school or cleaners entering or leaving your premises.
Telephone numbers can be 32 digits long and characters
0-9 * # and , are supported with the comma representing a
2 second pause. Destination route 1 and route 2 both have their own Primary and Secondary telephone numbers,
Domestic reporting has 3 telephone numbers and remote access has one call back number.
There are two back to base monitoring formats called CID and SIA, both formats are all predefined so the system will always send the same reporting code for the same event.
The type of zone selected under zone type automatically determines the reporting code to the base station. If a zone is defined as Medical then when it goes into alarm the report will be Medical Alarm, if a zone is programmed as a Fire zone then the report will automatically be Fire
Alarm.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
CO M M S P R O G R A M M I N G CO M M A N D S
Comms > Commands >
Call/Answer RAS
-
-
MENU 5-0-1
This command allows you to initiate a modem call to an off-site computer for programming changes or updates. The off-site computer must be connected to the telephone line that is programmed in the call back telephone number and be set to wait for an incoming call from the same customer that initiates the modem call.
If the phone is ringing and this command is enetered, then the panel will answer the call and attempt to start a
Solution Link RAS session.
Comms > Commands >
Call Forward On/Off
-
MENU 5-0-2
This command allows you to turn on and off the call forward feature. When you turn on call forwarding, the panel will automatically activate and de-activate the call forward on and call forward off sequence accordingly when you turn Area 1 All On and Off (arm and disarm).
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [2]. If the call forward
status is OFF, the keypad will display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is OFF
To turn ON, Press ON.
To Go Back Press OK
If the call forward status is ON, the keypad will display:
Call Forward On/Off
Call Forward is ON.
To Turn OFF, Press OFF.
To Go Back Press OK
2) To toggle call forward on, press the [ON] key or
press the [OFF] key to turn call forward off.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
i
Note
See MENU 5-1-6 and MENU 5-1-7 to program the
Call Forward ON and Call Forward OFF number sequence.
9-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Commands >
Check Web Email
Reserved
Comms > Commands >
Email System Log
Reserved
Comms > Commands >
Start Direct Link
Press OK or MENU
-
-
-
MENU 5-0-3
MENU 5-0-4
MENU 5-0-5
This menu allows the installer or master user to start a direct link session without the need to press and hold the default button on the control panel.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [5]. The keypad will
display the following:
Waiting for Direct Link
Attempt!
Comms > Commands >
Voice Setup
-
MENU 5-0-6
This menu allows the master user to record their own customised greeting and zone description message that will be played back to users that are programmed to receive domestic telephone calls from the alarm system.
These messages should be clear enough so that the user receiving the telephone call from the control panel can then take the appropriate action.
This feature requires an optional voice module to be fitted to the control panel by your installer. Additional programming information is included with the voice module.
When answering an incoming voice call, the operations are as follows:
[#]
Acknowledge single message.
[*] [*]
Acknowledge all messages, hang up and leave in cue for next person.
[*]
Acknowledge message and leave in the cue for next person.
PIN
[OFF]
Disarm the system and abort all pending voice messages (except Open/Close).
Once the computer and control panel establishes a connection, the command will automatically exit.
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit. i
Note
Voice reports for control panel events 255 and
greater did not report, or if an event that was not supposed to report (ie. Event 258), the control panel would have looked up the entry for report event 002
(eg. Event 258 minus Event 256).
In version 2.19, the control panel now includes support for a number of expanded voice report options which were not included in previous builds.
V2.19 or higher is recommended for systems using a voice module.
Solution 6000 Control Panel
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [0] + [6] + [OK].
Enter the telephone number of the mobile phone you are using to record the messages from. (eg.
0411123456), then press the [OK] key. The alarm system will now call the programmed number.Answer the incoming call on the mobile telephone and you will hear the following message;
Press 1 to play a message,
2 to record a message or 3 to end.
2) The alarm keypad will display the available options
on the display awaiting your selection. Using the alarm keypad enter the number corresponding to the operation you want to perform.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I 9-2
Play Message
Record Message
Exit
PRESS
OK or MENU
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Recording New Messages
To record a new message, follow the instructions in steps
1 to 3 above and then,
3) Press [1] on the alarm keypad to playback and
listen to a message, or press [2] to record a new message.
i
Note
For the best results when recording
messages speak loudly and clearly into the mobile phone and reduce as much background noise as possible.
We do not recommend recording using hands free operation.
Playing Back A Message
4) The system will then prompt you to Enter the
message number followed by the [OK] key. Enter the message number on the alarm keypad and press the [OK] key.
4) The system will then prompt you to Enter the
message number followed by the [OK] key. Enter the message number on the alarm keypad and press the [OK] key.
Zone 1 Message
Zone 2 Message
Zone 3 Message
Press
OK or MENU
Alternatively, you can use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll to the message required, then press [OK] to select.
Refer to the voice module instruction sheet for a complete list of the message numbers.
Alternatively, you can use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to scroll to the message required, then press [OK] to select.
Refer to the voice module instruction sheet for a complete list of the message numbers.
The keypad will display the following below whilst playing the current recorded message via the telephone.
Playing
Zone 1 Message
5) On the mobile phone you will hear a short beep
indicating that recording has begun. You should now speak clearly into the mobile phone to record the new message as required and press [OK] when finished.
Press OK or MENU
Zone 1 Message
Zone 2 Message
Zone 3 Message
Press
OK or MENU
Recording
Zone 1 Message
5) After the message has been played, the system will
automatically return to the main menu as shown in step 5 above.
Press OK or MENU
If the message duration expires before you finish recording you will hear a long beep indicating that recording has finished. If this happens you may need to speak a little faster when recording or shorten the actual message to fit in the available message space.
6) You should now follow the instructions to playback
the message. When you are happy with the newly recorded message repeat the steps to customise the remaining messages. If you would like to overwrite or re-record the same message again simply repeat the appropriate steps until you are satisfied.
i
Note
Currently it is not possible to reset the
programmable messages back to the factory default settings.
9-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Commands >
Register Customer
-
MENU 5-0-8
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Destination 1
-
MENU 5-1-1
1 Digits 32
Phone 1
Reserved
1 Digits 32
Comms > Commands >
Register Installer
MENU 5-0-9
Phone 2
1 Digits 32
Phone 3
Reserved
1 Digits 32
Phone 4
P H O N E N U M B E R P R O G R A M M I N G
1 Digits 32
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Number Prefix
MENU 5-1-0
Phone 5
1 Digits
The number prefix allows you to program the customer account number and pass code (PIN) to access the telephone line exchange when using a pre-paid telephone account (e.g. Telstra Communic8 Pre-Paid Home account), or when a number followed by a pause is required to get an outside line on a PABX system.
The number prefix is global for all telephone numbers programmed in both Destination 1 and Destination 2
(including the domestic telephone numbers and call forward sequences). the prefix will be dialled immediately before the number.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Telco Number Prefix.
Number Prefix
Press
OK to SAVE
32
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
telephone number prefix. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
This menu sets the primary telephone number for Report
Destination 1. This will typically be the primary base station receiver number. The master code user can only change telephone numbers when the destination is set to report in domestic format, voice format or SMS format.
SMS CALL-ALERT i
Note
SMS Call Alert requires an optional 2G GSM Module
CM743B or 3G GSM Module CM744B to be fitted.
When entering the mobile telephone number you wish to send the SMS report to you can append *00* to the number which tells the system to call the mobile number first then send the SMS report. This is especially useful at night when a simple SMS message may not be satisfactory to get your attention but a phone call to your mobile will. With many smart phones your able to tailor the ring depending on the caller and you could use an appropriate alarm sound to indicate your alarm system is trying to contact you. We refer to this feature as a ping to the number and it can be selected for one or all the mobile numbers in the list as well as being able to select the number of seconds (1-99) that the phone will ring for.
Examples:
Phone 1:
0408249351 (this will only send SMS to this number)
Phone 2:
0412400922* (this will call the number first for 20 seconds then send the SMS)
Phone 3:
0408249351*35* (This will call the number first for 35 seconds then send the SMS)
9-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [1].
If the control panel is not programmed to report using one of the self monitoring formats, the keypad will display the following:
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming change telephone numbers when the destination is set to report in domestic format, voice format or SMS format.
SMS CALL-ALERT
Reporting format does not allow user changes.
Contact installer for further information
i
Note
SMS Call Alert requires an optional 2G GSM Module
CM743B or 3G GSM Module CM744B to be fitted.
2) If the control panel has been configured to report
via a self monitoring format, the keypad will display information for telephone number 1.
Phone 1= 0453287306
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Press
OK or MENU
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the phone number
to add or change, then press [OK] to select.
The keypad will display the following:
When entering the mobile telephone number you wish to send the SMS report to you can append *00* to the number which tells the system to call the mobile number first then send the SMS report. This is especially useful at night when a simple SMS message may not be satisfactory to get your attention but a phone call to your mobile will. With many smart phones your able to tailor the ring depending on the caller and you could use an appropriate alarm sound to indicate your alarm system is trying to contact you. We refer to this feature as a ping to the number and it can be selected for one or all the mobile numbers in the list as well as being able to select the number of seconds (1-99) that the phone will ring for.
Destination 1 Phone 1
Examples:
0453287306_
Press
0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the [] and [] keys to scroll the cursor left
and right across the phone number. Use the []
and [] keys to change the individual digit in the
number or press the [OFF] key to clear the whole number and then enter the new number using the
[0]-[9] keys.
5) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
Phone 1:
0408249351 (this will only send SMS to this number)
Phone 2:
0412400922* (this will call the number first for 20 seconds then send the SMS)
Phone 3:
0408249351*35* (This will call the number first for 35 seconds then send the SMS)
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Destination 2
1 Digits
Phone 1
1 Digits
Phone 2
1 Digits
Phone 3
1 Digits
Phone 4
-
MENU 5-1-2
32
32
32
32
1 Digits 32
Phone 5
This menu sets the primary telephone number for Report
Destination 2. This will typically be the primary base station receiver number. The master code user can only
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [2].
If the control panel is not programmed to report using one of the self monitoring formats, the keypad will display the following:
Reporting format does not allow user changes.
Contact installer for further information
2) If the control panel has been configured to report
via a self monitoring format, the keypad will display information for telephone number 1.
Phone 1= 0453287306
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Press
OK or MENU
9-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
3) Use the [] and [] keys to select the phone number
to add or change, then press [OK] to select.
The keypad will display the following:
Destination 2 Phone 1
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the
sequence. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
0453287306_
Press
0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the [] and [] keys to scroll the cursor left
and right across the phone number. Use the []
and [] keys to change the individual digit in the
number or press the [OFF] key to clear the whole number and then enter the new number using the
[0]-[9] keys.
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Call Forward Off
1
# 6 1 #
Digits
-
MENU 5-1-7
32
5) Press [OK] to save and exit, or press [MENU] to
cancel.
The panel is also able to deactivate certain Telco services such as Call Forwarding when the system is disarmed.
This means that your customer will no longer need to remember to manually deactivate Call Forwarding when they disarm the system.
Comms > Telephone Numbers >
Call Forward On
-
MENU 5-1-6
MENU 5-1-7 allows you to program the Call Forward
Off number sequence. When disarmed the panel will automatically seize the phone line and dial the number sequence and then hang up.
1 Digits
• 6 1 , * 2 0 #
32
In Australia, a typical sequence for deactivating the Call-
Forward On feature (All Calls) might be:
The panel is able to activate certain Telco services such as Call Forwarding when the system is armed. Call forwarding means that your customer will no longer need to remember to manually activate the Call Forward On feature via the telephone before leaving.
#61 #
#61 = diversion type - Call Forward On -
Immediate - Disable.
# = end of sequence
MENU 5-1-6 allows you to program the Call Forward
On number sequence. When armed the panel will automatically seize the phone line and dial the number sequence and then hang up.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [7]. The keypad will
display any current Call Forward Off sequences.
Call Forward Off
In Australia, a typical sequence for activating the Call-
Forward On feature (All Calls) might be:
*61 0416123456 *20 #
#61#
Press OK to SAVE
*61 diversion type - Call Forward On -
Immediate.
0416123456 Telephone number that you want calls to be diverted to. Example shows mobile number.
*20 20 second delay
# end of sequence
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all digits for the
sequence. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [1] + [6]. The keypad will
display any current Call Forward sequnces.
Call Forward On
*61,*20#
Press
OK to SAVE
9-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
CO M M S P R O P E R T I E S
Comms > Properties >
Call Attempt Count
MENU 5-2-0
0 6
This menu programs the maximum number of call attempts the panel will make per destination in order to deliver the report signal.
At factory default, the maximum number of call attempts per event is 6 when reporting to a single destination and
12 attempts when reporting to 2 destinations. (6 attempts per destination)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current number of call attempts per destination. (Default = 6).
Call Attempt Count
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Dialler Options.
Dialler Enabled
Pulse Dialling
Dial Tone Detect
Press OK ON OFF MENU
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Properties >
Dialler Options
1 Dialler Enabled
2 Pulse Dialling
3 Dial Tone Detect
4 Busy Tone Detect
5 Mirror Report To Web
6 Extend H/S To 1min
7 Reserved
8 Abort Failed Reports
MENU 5-2-1
N
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the required number
of call attempts per destination.Valid entries are 1 to 10. 0 = reporting disabled
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Setting the Call Attempt count to zero will disable all
reporting for Destination 1 and Destination 2
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Dialler Enabled
This option enables the dialler reporting function. When disabled, all dialler reporting will stop.
Pulse Dialling
This option will configure the panel to use pulse or decadic dialling rather than tone or DTMF dialling. DTMF dialling should always be used unless the telephone network you are communicating on does not support it.
Dial Tone Detect
This option configures the panel to start dialling as soon as it detects dial tone on the line. This can speed up the dialing process by up to 3 seconds. If no tone is detected the panel will blind dial after 4 seconds.
If this option is disabled the panel will blind dial.
Busy Tone Detect
This option configures the panel to detect busy tone. If a busy tone is detected during the dialling sequence, the panel will immediatly hang up and move on to the next number in the sequence in an attempt to get the report through as quickly as possible.
If this option is disabled, the panel will wait for a period of 30 seconds before dialling the next telephone number in the sequence. The 30 second timer starts when the first digit of the first telephone number is dialled.
9-7
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Mirror Report WEB
Reserved.
Extend H/S To 1min
This option sets the panel to wait for up to 60 seconds to receive a valid handshake signal from the base station receiver. The handshake tone indicates to the panel that it has reached the security company’s base station receiver and can now send it’s pending reports.
If this option is disabled the handshake wait time will default to 30 seconds.
the panel is able to report this signal via an alternative reporting method such as the GSM cellular network.
If no alternative route exists then the panel will send the signal and restore when the PSTN line is reconnected.
Alarm L/Fail If On
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the telco line fails provided that the area is turned All On or
Part On. In a multi-area system this option is global and will be triggered if only one area in the system is in the armed state. The alarm will continue to sound until a valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Abort Failled Reports
Setting this option will cause a failled report to be flagged in the log and no further reports will be made for that event.
i
Note
A report will be failled if the number of programmed
dial attempts has been reached .
Alarm L/Fail If Off
This option sets the panel to trigger an alarm when the telco line fails provided that the area is turned OFF or disarmed. In a multi-area system this option is global and will be triggered if only one area in the system is in the disarmed state. The alarm will continue to sound until a valid PIN is entered or the siren timer expires.
Comms > Properties >
Phone Line Options
1 Display Line Fail
2 Report Line Fail
3 Alarm L/Fail If On
4 Alarm L/Fail If Off
5 Reserved
6 Digital Line
7 Low Voltage
8 Display On Line
MENU 5-2-2
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Phone Line Options.
Display Line Fail
Report Line Fail
Alarm L/Fail If On
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Digital Line
If you are having issues reporting or with RAS connections and the system is connected to a VOIP or
NBN digital line then you should set the Digital Line option to yes.
i
Note
This option has been added in version 2.15.
Low Voltage
If the PSTN line voltage at the panel when the dialler is on line is below 6 volts DC then you should set the Low
Voltage option to yes.
i
Note
This option has been added in version 2.15.
Display On Line
This option allows the keypad to display Phone In Use when the telephone line has been looped by the control panel for either incoming or outgoing calls. If this option is disabled, no indication is provided on the keypad. i
Note
The dialler status indicator LED located on the main
panel will always show the status of the dialler. See
Section 3 - Wiring Diagrams for more information.
Display Line Fail
This option sets the panel to display a trouble signal on the keypad display when the panel detects a teleco line fail condition.
Report Line Fail
This option sets the panel to send a line fail report when it detects a telco line fail condition. If configured,
9-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Comms > Properties >
Country
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-2-3
0 1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Properties >
Set SMS Password
MENU 5-2-7 p a s s w d
Ln1 AUSTRALIA
Ln2 NEW ZEALAND
Ln3 ITALY
Ln4 GREECE
Ln5 CYPRUS
Ln6 SPAIN
Ln7 PORTUGAL
Ln8 HUNGARY
Ln9 CZECH REPUBLIC
Ln10 POLAND
Ln11 TURKEY
Ln12 CHINA
Ln13 HONG KONG
Ln14 MALAYSIA
Ln15 BRAZIL
This menu sets the SMS password which is required whenever SMS reporting is selected. The password will typically be defined by the service provider or Telco carrier who you are using to route the message.
By default the SMS password is set to suit the Telstra
Network in Australia.
This menu automatically sets the dialling parameters including dial and busy tones etc. for the country the panel is working in.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5]+[2]+[7]. The keypad will display
the current SMS password.
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the password is complete, press
[OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [2] + [3]. The keypad will
display the currently selected country. The default country is Australia.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
appropriate country then Press [OK].
Ln1 AUSTRALIA
Ln2 NEW ZEALAND
Ln3 ITALY
Press OK or MENU i
Note
SMS Pager Password passwd
Press OK to SAVE
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 -
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
3) Press [OK] to confirm and save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
WARNING: Press OK to set dialler to
AUSTRALIA
i
Note
For correct dialler operation, you must make sure
that the correct country selection is made for your location. If your country is not listed here please contact your distibutor.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
9-9
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Remote Access >
Call Back Number
MENU 5-3-0
Comms > Remote Access >
RAS Security PIN
MENU 5-3-1
1 Digits 32
This menu sets the call back telephone number which can be used to establish a Solution Link RAS connection to the panel for remote programming. The remote computers modem should be connected to this number and Solution
Link should be set to wait for an incomming call.
The installer or customer can force the panel to dial this number by entering MENU 5-0-1.
For higher security the panel can be configured to always use this number for callback verification when establishing a Solution Link remote access connection. The following steps outline the callback procedure.
Step 1) Use Solution Link RAS to call panel from remote computer.
Step 2) Panel will answer, acknowledge the request and then hang up.
Step 3) Panel will then dial the callback number.
Step 4) Solution Link will answer the call and establish a
RAS session.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The RAS security PIN programmed here must match the security PIN programmed in the customer file of the
Solution Link RAS upload/download database otherwise a connection to the panel cannot be established.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RAS Security PIN. The default =
12345678.
RAS Security PIN
12345678
Press OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
new RAS security PIN. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
See MENU 5-3-4 to force Callback Verification for
every RAS Session.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Call Back telephone number if programmed.
Call Back Number
Press OK to SAVE
Comms > Remote Access >
Log Threshold
MENU 5-3-2
7 0 %
The control panel can store up to 1000 system events in its built in history log. A newly installed panel will have 100% of its log space available for new events (0% full). As the panel starts to store events in the log, the capacity for new events is reduced. The history log is 100% full when event
999 is stored in memory. Event 1000 will start to overwrite the oldest events in the log.
When the Log Threshold option is programmed, the panel will send a ‘Log Threshold’ report to the base station when the event log reaches the percentage as set since the last
Solution Link session.
If the event log reaches 100% capacity before a Solution
Link RAS session is established then the system will send a
‘Log Overflow’ report. The panel will also log these events in its memory.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
Call Back number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
You must add any area codes or other special access
numbers which are required to be able to dial the remote computer from the panel phone line. Simply add these numbers before the Call Back number.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current threshold limit. The default is
70% full.
Log Threshold
070 Percents
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys enter the new threshold
limit, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. There is no need to enter the % symbol.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I 9-10
i
Note
Each time a Solution Link RAS session is established
with the panel, the log information will be uploaded to the Solution Link database where it can be reported on or archived for later use
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
RAS Allowed
This option allows you to configure the panel via the
Solution Link RAS upload/download software using a PC.
There are two different methods of connection avialable;
Comms > Remote Access >
Ring Count
00 - No Answer
01 to 30 - Answer Ring Count
MENU 5-3-3
2 0
This menu sets the number of rings the panel will wait until answering an incoming call. Programming a zero will stop the panel from answering any incoming calls.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current ring count.
Ring Count
20-20 Rings
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
1) Direct Connect – via serial cable.
2) Remote Connect – via telephone line. i
Note
See Direct Link and Solution Link RAS Upload/
Download programming in Section 5 —
Programming Overview for more information.
Callback Verify
Setting this option will force the panel to use call back verification for all remote Solution Link RAS sessions. See
MENU 5-3-0 — Call back Number for more information.
Abort RAS On Alarm
If this option is programmed, the remote RAS connection between the panel and the remote upload / download computer will be terminated if panel registers an alarm that needs to be reported.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
required ring count then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
If answering machine bypass is required to allow a
Solution Link connection to be made without the answering machine answering the call, see MENU
5-3-4 — Solution Link RAS Options
Answering Bypass
Answering machine bypass allows you to establiish a
RAS connection to a panel when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine connected on the same telephone line.
Comms > Remote Access >
RAS Options
1 RAS Allowed
2 Callback Verify
3 Abort RAS On Alarm
4 Answer Bypass
5 Answer Only If Armed
6 RAS Only If Disarmed
7 Allow User Functions
8 Report RAS Sessions
MENU 5-3-4
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
1) Using Solution Link call the paneland let the phone
ring no more than 4 times before hanging up.
2) Wait a minimum of 8 seconds (but no more than 60
seconds) before calling the panel again. This time the panel will answer the incoming call as soon as it registers the first ring and the connection will be established.
Answer Only If Armed
Setting this option will prevent the panel from answering an incoming call unless at least one area on the system is armed. If all areas are off the panel will not answer the call. This option would be useful in a busy office when due to the large volume of incomming calls answering machine bypass may not be effective.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current RAS options.
RAS Allowed
Callback Verify
Abort RAS On Alarm
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
RAS Only If Disarmed
Setting this option restricts the control panel to only allow remote telephone line RAS sessions when all areas are turned off (disarmed).
If this option is not set, the control panel will allow remote telephone RAS sessions when any and/or all areas are turned All On or Part On and Off.
Allow User Functions
Setting this option allows access to user functions via the RAS upload/download software. If this option is not programmed, user functions will be disabled.
9-11
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Report RAS Sessions
Setting this option will cause the panel to report the start and end of RAS programming sessions to the base station and the history log.
Comms > Remote Access >
DTMF Options
1 DTMF Arming
2 DTMF Disarming
3 DTMF User Functions
4 DTMF Quick Arming
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 5-3-5
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current DTMF options.
DTMF Arming
DTMF Disarming
DTMF User Functions
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
DTMF Arming
Setting this option enables user to remotely arm one or more areas on the panel using their PIN and a touch tone phone.
DTMF Disarming
Setting this option enables users to remotely disarm one or more areas on the panel using their PIN and a touch tone telephone.
DTMF User Functions
Setting this option enables access to user DTMF functions using their PIN and a touch tone telephone.
DTMF Quick Arming
Setting this option allows users and control room operators to remotely arm the system using a touch tone phone without the need for a PIN.
To arm the system call the number which the panel is connected to and when the panel answer you will here
3 beeps in accending frequency if the panel is in the disarmed condition. Press [0] + [#] to arm. You will hear 3 beeps in decending order when the panel arms.
i
Note
All areas on the system will be armed regardless of
there condition when using the DTMF quick arm function. These functions follow both timer groups and door assignments.
Unlike other systems, no additional hardware or modules are required for DTMF control.
1) Once the panel answers the incoming call, if either
option 1, 2, 3 or 4 in MENU 5-3-5 is enabled, then the panel will play a short welcome jingle. You now have approximately 5 seconds to enter a valid PIN and log onto the panel.
2) Enter PIN followed by the [#] key. If the PIN is valid
the system will respond with two short beeps. If the
PIN is invalid then a single long beep will be heard.
3) If a valid PIN is not entered in time, the panel will
attempt to establish a modem connection as if connecting to the Solution Link software.
If this happens you will need to hang up for approximately 60 seconds before trying again.
Once validated, the following commands can be performed. See the table below. If no keys are pressed for 20 seconds then the panel will play the exit jingle before terminating the session and hanging up. Pressing
[#][#] at any time while connected will cause the panel to terminate the session.
DTMF CONTROL FUNC TIONS
Operation
Quick Arm
All Areas
Command
[0] + [#]
Tone
Response
High,
Medium,
Low
Log In
OK
Error
Turn Area
ON
Turn Area
OFF
Turn Output
ON
Turn Output
OFF
[PIN] + [#]
Incorrect Entry
[1] + [Area N o
] + [#] + [1]
[1] + [Area N o ] + [#] + [2]
[2] + [Output N o ] + [#] + [1]
[2] + [Output N o
] + [#] + [2]
Low, High
Long Beep
Low, High
High, Low
Low, High
High, Low
End
Session
[#] + [#]
High,
Medium,
Low
Table 25: DTMF Remote Control Functions
DTMF EXAMPLES
Each example below shows the log on step for clarity. In practise is only necessary to log on once per DTMF control session.
9-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
To turn Area 1 ON enter the following
Comms > Remote Access >
CLI Numbers
MENU 5-3-7
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
To turn Output 10 ON enter the following
i
[1] + [1] + [#] + [1] = Arm Area 1
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
[2] + [1] [0] + [#] + [1] = Turn Output 10 ON
disabled by default on some phones.
First
Number
Second
1
1
Phone 1=
Digits
Digits
32
32
To turn Output 12 OFF enter the following
Note
[2] [5] [8] [0] [#] = Log ON
Number
Third
1 Digits 32
[2] + [1] [2] + [#] + [2] = Turn Output 12 OFF
If the DTMF Quick Arm option is enabled
then it is possible to remotely arm all areas without logging onto the panel.
Simply enter [0] + [#] following the welcome jingle.
CLI Numbers (Call Line Identification) allows the control panel to answer an incoming call only when the control panel identifies that the incoming call is from any one of the three CLI numbers programmed. Up to three different
CLI telephone numbers can be programmed, each having a maximum of 32 digits.
Make sure that the phone being used to remotely
Number control the panel is set to transmit DTMF tones when keys are pressed during the call. This option is
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [7]. The keypad will
display the following:
Comms > Remote Access >
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Voice Access Code
MENU 5-3-6
Press OK or MENU
9 #
This option sets a 2 digit code which is used to access the panel from any internal phone connected to the same telco line as the panel. For this option to work, a CM101B
Voice Module must be connected to the panel.
This default number may need to be changed depending on the country and or telco exchange / PABX system being used. Make sure that when the code is entered, no external phone services are selected or activated. If they are, then change the code to something else.
It is important to realise that this code is only used to start the connection process. Once a connection is established, the voice module will ask the user to enter their PIN before they will be able to control the panel. The Voice Access
Code is shared by all users who need this type of access to the panel. See the CM101B documention for more details.
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI number, then press [OK] to select.
CLI Numbers Phone 1
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the MENU. i
Note
Up to 3 Phone numbers can be entered for CLI Call
Line Identification for remote access detection. Press
[OK] after each telephone number is entered to save and move to the next number.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current DTMF options.
Voice Access Code
The control panel is only required to match part
of the CLI telephone number programmed to the number of the incoming call.
9#
Press OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys enter the new Voice Access
Code then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Example
If the programmed CLI telephone number is
0296721777, the control panel would only be required to match part of the telephone number (eg.
96721777) to answer the incoming call.
9-13
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Remote Access >
User RAS PIN MENU 5-3-8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The user RAS PIN must be changed from factory default for Site Manager upload/download sessions.
Use keys 0 - 9 to program User RAS PIN + [OK] to save.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [3] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current User RAS PIN.
User RAS PIN
00000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys to program the user RAS PIN
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
R E P O R T I N G O P T I O N S
Comms > Reporting >
TX Format Dest 1
MENU 5-4-0
00 - Disabled
01 - Contact ID PSTN
02 - SIA PSTN
03 - Reserved
04 - Reserved
05 - Reserved
06 - SMS PSTN
07 - Domestic PSTN
0 1
08 - Voice PSTN
09 - SIA+ PSTN
10 - PSTN Voice+GSM SMS
11 - GSM 2G Contact ID
12 - GSM SMS
13 - Ethernet
14 - GPRS
15 - MyAlarm IP
This menu allows you to program the transmission format or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 1. The panel has two separate destinations that reports can be sent to and each one can be set to use a different transmission format depending on the application.
At factory default, all reports are routed to Destination 1.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current Transmission Format for
Destination 1.
TX Format Dest 1
01 - Contact ID
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Transmission Format required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Version 2.19 is the first version of the Solution 6000
control panel that supports the new CM744 3G Radio
Module.
The following formats are supported by the 3G module in this panel firmware release.
SMS Format via GSM
CSV-IP Format via GPRS
Conettix Format via GPRS
Support for the MyAlarm iFob App and RAS upload/ download via GPRS is not included in this release but will be available in future firmware updates. There is no support in the 3G module for Contact ID over
GSM.
9-14 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Comms > Reporting >
TX Format Dest 2
MENU 5-4-1
00 - Disabled
01 - Contact ID PSTN
02 - SIA PSTN
03 - Reserved
04 - Reserved
05 - Reserved
06 - SMS PSTN
07 - Domestic PSTN
0 1
08 - Voice PSTN
09 - SIA+ PSTN
10 - PSTN Voice+GSM SMS
11 - GSM 2G Contact ID
12 - GSM SMS
13 - Ethernet
14 - GPRS
15 - MyAlarm IP
This menu allows you to program the transmission format or language the panel will use to send event reports to
Destination 2.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Transmission Format for
Destination 2.
TX Format Dest 2
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
The control panel will first call the destination telephone number for the set time of 5 seconds, hang up, then send the pending SMS message.
i
Note
In previous versions, when arming or disarming using a fingerprint reader or an RF keyfob, the system would fail to report the event when using voice format reporting. Other reporting formats are not affected. In version 2.14, this has been corrected.
i
Note
In previous versions, the control panel failed to correctly report zone alarm events for expanded zones when the system is configured for voice reporting. Other formats are not affected. In version
2.15, this has been corrected.
i
Note
In previous versions, console events for keypads or
readers that are addressed between 09 and 16 would report back to base with incorrect Point ID's.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. Console events for keypads or readers addressed between 09 and 16 report with Point ID's 971 to 978.
01 - Contact ID
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE i
Note
In previous versions, IP Poll Fail and restore events
would report back to base using an incorrect Point
ID.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Transmission Format required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
A feature for GSM SMS reporting has been included to allow the control panel to first call the telephone number that the SMS event will be sent to. This feature is very helpfull when an alarm event occurs while you are sleeping as the longer alert tone will wake you where as the short SMS alert provided on many mobile phone may not. The duration of the alert call can be set between 5 and 99 seconds or fixed at 20 seconds - see below for details when programming
Destination 1 or Destination 2 telephone numbers below:
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. An IP Poll Fail event will include Point ID 901 to identify Destination
1 and Point ID 902 to identify Destination 2.
Comms > Reporting >
Test Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-4-2
0 1
This menu programs which destination will be used to send both manual and automatic test reports.
Example - No Pre-Alert Call
[Phone #] (eg. 0416123456) the control panel will only send the pending SMS message to the destination telephone number without calling beforehand.
Example - Fixed 20 Second Pre-Alert Call
[Phone #][*] (eg. 0416123456*)
The control panel will first call the destination telephone number for 20 seconds, hang up, then send the pending SMS message.
Example - Set Time Pre-Alert Call (eg. 5 Seconds)
[Phone #][*][Time][*] (eg. 0416123456*05*)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Test Route.
Test Route
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
9-15
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Reporting >
System Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-4-3
0 1
Comms > Reporting >
Swinger Dialler
MENU 5-4-5
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0 6
Swinger Dialler can be used to prevent a faulty or runa-way PIR from continually re-triggering the zone and reporting to the base station.
This menu sets the report destination that will be used to send all system event reports.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Status Report route.
System Route
The Swinger Dialler count sets the maximum number of times an individual zone can trigger an alarm during the current arming cycle before it is locked out.
If this option is not programmed, the panel will continue to report the alarm signal until the system or area is disarmed.
Only zones that have been programmed for Lockout
Dialler in MENU 3-1-7 — Report Options will follow the
Swinger Dialler count.
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current Swinger Dialler count.
Swinger Dialler
MENU 5-4-4
0 1
6
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Comms > Reporting >
Emergency Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new Swinger
Dialler count then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entries are 0 - 15 / 0 = disabled.
This menu programs the destination that all Keypad emergency alarms are reported.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Emergency Route.
Emergency Route
Comms > Reporting >
Burg Report Delay
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-4-6
0 0 0
Seconds
This menu programs how long the panel will delay reporting Burglary alarm reports. Only burglary (nonfire) zones that have been programmed for Delay Report in MENU 3-1-7 — Report Option will follow the Burglary
Report Delay time.
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Keypad Emergency route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current burglary report delay time.
Burg Report Delay
000 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay
time then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires are 0 to 255 seconds
9-16 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Comms > Reporting >
Fire Report Delay
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 5-4-7
0 0 0
Seconds
This menu programs how long the panel will delay reporting fire zone alarm reports. Only fire zones that have been programmed for Delay Report in MENU 3-1-7
— Report Option will follow the Fire Report Delay time.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [4] + [7]. The keypad will
display the current Fire Report Delay time.
Fire Report Delay
i
Note
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
MENU 5-5-1 should be left at the factory default
settings unless you are advised otherwise by the manufacturer.
1) Enter [5] + [5] + [1] + [OK]. Use the arrow keys to
select the IP port to program, then press the [OK] key. The keypad will display the current MyAlarm
Port number.
Primary IP Port
07703
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
000 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the IP address
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new report delay
time then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires are 0 to 255 seconds.
M YA L A R M
Comms > MyAlarm >
IP Address
MENU 5-5-0
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This menu programs the 12 digit MyAlarm IP Address.
Comms > MyAlarm >
MyAlarm Options
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
This location is a Bit option field.
MENU 5-5-2
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
i
Note
MENU 5-5-0 should be left at the factory default
settings unless you are advised otherwise by the manufacturer.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [0]. Use the arrow keys to
select the IP address to program, then press the
[OK] key. The keypad will display the current IP address.
Primary IP Address
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the IP address
required, then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > MyAlarm >
IP Port
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
MENU 5-5-1
0 9 0 5 0
This menu programs the 5 digit MyAlarm Port number.
Range must be programmed within 0 to 65535.
Comms > MyAlarm >
Gateway Numbers
MENU 5-5-7
SMS Primary
1 Digits
1 3 4 5 0 6 4 1
SMS Secondary
1 Digits
1 3 4 5 1 8 2 5
1 Digits
1 3 4 5 2 5 0 5
MyAlarm
1 Digits
1 3 4 5 2 5 0 5
32
32
32
32
This menu allows the installer to program the gateway telephone numbers for both SMS and email reporting.
The MyAlarm gateway telephone number is currently not used.
When SMS reporting, the control panel will call the SMS primary number first. If the control panel fails to report via the SMS primary number, the control panel will then
9-17
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming use the SMS secondary number until all current event reports are sent. The next time the control panel needs to report, the control panel will revert back to the SMS primary number.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [7]. address or disable all of the email options in MENU
5-5-9.
i
Note
When entering an email address the @ symbol is
represented on the keypad display as .
To enter this character press the 1 key repeatedly until the symbol appears in the display.
SMS Primary
SMS Secondary
Press
OK or MENU
2) Highlight the gateway telephone number to
change and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current gateway telephone number.
without saving.
Comms > MyAlarm >
Email Address
Gateway Numbers SMS Pri
13450641
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter all the digits of the
gateway telephone number. You can change a single digit by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters including, pause, * or #, use the up and down arrow keys.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
-
MENU 5-5-8
Comms > MyAlarm >
Email Options
1 Open Close
2 Zones
3 System
4 Access
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
-
MENU 5-5-9
This menu allows the master user to select which event types will be reported using the email reporting function.
By default the first 4 options are set to report via email.
Follow the procedure below to configure the required options.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [9].
The keypad will display the list of current options.
Options with a preceeding tick mark are selected.
Address
1 Characters 80
This menu allows the master user to program an email address that the system will send email reports to. A maximum of 80 characters can be used to program the email address.
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [5] + [8].
The keypad will display the current email address.
Email Address
Press
OK to SAVE
Open Close
Zones
System
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the [] and [] keys to highlight the feature that
you want to program, then use the [ON] and [OFF] keys to turn on and off the features as required.
3) When all email options are programmed, press [OK]
to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
Open Close
This option allows the control panel to report ‘open’ and
‘close’ reports via email.
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
2) Use the numeric, [0] to [9], [] and [] keys to enter
or change the email address as required.
At any time you can use the [] and [] keys to scroll through the complete list of available characters.
To clear all characters from the cursor position to the right, press the [OFF] key.
3) When the email address is complete, press [OK] to
save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
To stop email reporting simply remove the email
Zones
This option allows the control panel to report zone ‘alarm’ and ‘trouble' reports via email.
System
This option allows the control panel to report via email numerous system reports (e.g. AC Fail, Low Battery etc) via email.
9-18 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Access
This option allows the control panel to report via email when a valid token has been swiped eg. ‘Access Granted’ or ‘Access Denied’.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [1]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which destination (destination
1 or 2) that you want to program the base staion port number.
Comms > IP Reporting >
Receiver IP
Dest Nº 1
MENU 5-6-0
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Dest Nº 2
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
base station IP address.
Receiver IP Rr1
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
This menu allows the installer to program the TCP IP address for Destination 1 and/or Destination 2 so that the control panel can communicate to the base station receiver.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the base staion IP addrress.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
2) Hightlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current base station
port number.
Receiver Port Rr1
07700
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
MyAlarm IP Address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the new MyAlarm IP Address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
Poll Rate
MENU 5-6-2
0 3 6 0
Seconds x 10
This menu allows the installer to program how often the control panel sends a signal to the base station receiver via Destination 1 and/or Destination 2. The poll interval programmed in seconds and then multiplied by 10 (eg.
0009 = 90 sec's / 0360 = 1 hr / 4320 = 12 hrs and 8640 =
24 hrs). This should be set so that the control panel sends a poll to the base station receiver at least once within the polling time required.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [2]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the poll rate.
Comms > IP Reporting >
Receiver Port
MENU 5-6-1
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
Dest Nº 1
Dest Nº 2
0 7 7 0 0
0 7 7 0 0
This menu allows the installer to program the TCP IP port number for Destination 1 and/or Destination 2 so that the control panel can communicate to the base station receiver. The port number must be 5 digits long within the range - to 65535.
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current poll rate.
Poll Rate Rr1
0360 Seconds X 10
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
9-19
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
poll rate in seconds (0000 to 9999 seconds x 10), then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
Comms > IP Reporting >
ACK Wait Time
MENU 5-6-3
0 1 0
Seconds
This menu allows the installer to program the acknowledge wait time in seconds for both Destination 1 and/or Destination 2. The acknowledge wait time can be programmed between 1 and 255 seconds (0 = Disabled).
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current IP format.
IP Format Rr1
01 - Conettix NNC
Press
0-9 OK to SAVE
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [3]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the acknowledge wait time.
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
IP format required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
3) The keypad will display the current acknowledge
wait time.
Ack Wait Time Rr1
010 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Comms > IP Reporting >
Retry Count
MENU 5-6-5
0 3
This menu allows the installer to program the number of attempts that the system will try to communicate via TCP/
IP to the base station receiver for both Destination 1 and/ or Destination 2. The retry count can be programmed between 01 and 15 (00=Disabled).
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [5]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the acknowledge wait time.
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
acknowledge wait time in seconds (000 to 255), then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
Comms > IP Reporting >
IP Format
00 - Conettix
01 - Conettix NNC (Anti Replay)
02 - CSV IP ALARM
03 - Reserved
04 - Reserved
05 - Reserved
06 - MyAlarm Contact ID
07 - MyAlarm CSV
MENU 5-6-4
0 1
This menu allows the installer to program which IP format the control panel will report to the base station receiver.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [4]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the acknowledge wait time.
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
The keypad will display the current retry count.
Retry Count Rr1
3
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the new
retry count, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
Encryption Key
MENU 5-6-6
9-20 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Dest Nº 1
1 Digits 32
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 Digits 32
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Dest Nº 2
The encryption key must match the encryption key on the base station receiver for communication to take place. To remove encryption, set MENU 6-6-4 as all zero’s.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [6]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which destination
(destination 1 or 2) that you want to program the acknowledge wait time.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
2) Highlight the destination number (1 or 2) required,
then press [OK]to select.
The keypad will display the current encryption key.
Encryption Key Rr1
0000000000000000000
Press
OK to SAVE
3) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 32 digitencryption key, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 8 digit NNC number, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Reporting >
SIA IP Prefix
MENU 5-6-8
Account
Dest Nº 1
Account
Dest Nº 2
1
Digits
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16
0
1
Digits
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Account Prefix
Dest Nº 1
16
0
1
Digits
6
0 0 0 0 0 0
Account Prefix
Dest Nº 2
Receiver Prefix
Dest Nº 1
1
Digits
6
0 0 0 0 0 0
1
Digits
6
0 0 0 0 0 0
Receiver Prefix
Dest Nº 2
1
Digits
6
0 0 0 0 0 0
Account Number
The account number is the most specific token and is always programmed into the premises equipment to identify it. The account token appears both in the header of the message (which is never encrypted) and in the data of the message (which may be encrypted).
This element consists of an ASCII "#", followed by 3 to 16
ASCII characters representing hexadecimal digits for the account number. There is no corresponding element in the DC-07 protocol.
In certain special applications, the information provided in the #acct element may not match the account number contained within the message data. For example, a manufacturer may choose to transmit a MAC address as an identifier.
Comms > IP Reporting >
Conettix NNC
Dest Nº 1
Dest Nº 2
MENU 5-6-7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The NCC number is used to prevent anti-replay attacks when reporting in Connetix format. The NNC number will be assigned by the control room at the time the account is setup. Like the account number, the NNC will always be unique.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [7]. The keypad will
display the first 6 digits of the current NNC number.
Account Prefix
The account prefix can be programmed into the PE to extend the identification provided by the account number.
This element is required and consists of an ASCII "L", followed by 1-6 HEX ASCII digits for the account prefix.
When the PE does not need to transmit an account prefix,
"L0" shall be transmitted for this element. This element corresponds with the receiver line number element in the DC-07 protocol.
Conettix NNC Rr1
00000000
Press
OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Receiver Prefix
In some cases, the PE may be programmed to futher extend the identification provided by the account number and account prefix by providing a receiver number. This element is optional and consists of an
ASCII "R", followed by 1-6 HEX ASCII digits for the receiver
9-21
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming number. When the PE does not need to transmit a receiver number, nothing shall by transmitted for this element (ie. "R" or "R0" are not to to be transmitted in this case).
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [8]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which option that you want to program.
Rt1 Dest 1
Rt2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
3) Highlight the destination that you want to
program, then press [OK] to select.
Username Rr1
SIA IP Account
SIA IP Account Prefix
SIA IP Receiver Prefix
Press
OK or MENU
Press
OK to SAVE
2) Highlight the option required, then press [OK] to
select.
4) Use the [0] to [9] and [] and [] keys to program
the parameter, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Rr1 Dest 1
Rr2 Dest 2
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
3) Highlight the destination that you want to
program, then press [OK] to select.
SIA IP Account Rr1
Press
OK to SAVE
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IP Address
Installer
-
MENU 5-7-0
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
User
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This menu allows the installer or master user the ability to program the Solution Link IP address.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which Solution Link IP address
(IP 1 = Installer or IP 2 = User) that you want to program.
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] to program the
parameter, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Installer
User
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
Comms > IP Reporting >
User Name/Password
MENU 5-6-9
1 Digits 16
Username
1 Digits 16
Password
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [6] + [9]. The keypad will
prompt you to select which option to program
(username or password) that you want to program.
The installer can now select either the installer
Solution Link IP address or the user Solution Link IP address by using the up and down arrow keys. If the
Master user programs this menu, the keyapd will only display the option to program the user IP address:
2) Select the which IP address that you want to
change (installer or user, then press [OK] to enter.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
Solution Link IP address.
Username
Password
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
RAS IP Address
000000000000
Press
OK to SAVE
2) Highlight the option required, then press [OK] to
select.
9-22
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IP Port
Installer
User
-
MENU 5-7-1
0 7 7 0 1
0 7 7 0 1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IP RAS Options
1 IP RAS Allowed
2 RAS Only If Disarmed
3 Report IP Session
4 Report IP Lockout
5 UDP Installer RAS
6 UDP User RAS
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 5-7-2
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
This menu allows the installer or master user the ability to program the Solution Link IP port number. The Solution
Link IP port number must be 5 digits in length and programmed within the range of 0 to 65535.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [1]. The keypad will
prompt you to enter which Solution Link IP port number (IP 1 = Installer or IP 2 = User) that you want to program..
This menu allows the installer to select which IP options are allowed.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [2].
The keypad will display the current options which are selected or enabled.
Installer
User
Exit
Press
OK or MENU
IP RAS Allowed
RAS Only If Disarmed
Report Session
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
The installer can now select either the installer
Solution Link IP port number or the user Solution Link
IP port number by using the up and down arrow keys.
If the Master user programs this menu, the keyapd will only display the option to program the user IP port number:
2) Select the which IP port number that you want to
change (installer or user, then press [OK] to enter.
3) The keypad will display the first six digits of the
Solution Link IP port number.
2) Use the numeric keys [1] to [8] to turn on and off the
features as required. When the corresponding number on the keypad is on then the option is selected.
3) When all email options are programmed, press [OK]
to save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without
saving.
IP RAS Allowed
This option allows the control panel to connect with
Solution Link via the optional ethernet module.
RAS IP Port
07701
Press
OK to SAVE
4) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
IP RAS Only If Disarmed
This option allows a RAS connection via TCP IP connection only when the system is disarmed.
Report IP Session
This option allows the control panel to report a RAS Start and RAS End session to the security base station when a remote TCP IP connection was made and ended.
Report IP Lockout
This option allows the control panel to report when the maximum number of incorrect attempts has been made to remotely connect to the panel using the IP connection method.
UDP Installer RAS
This option allows the control panel to communicate using the UDP internet protocol (User Datagram
Protocol) when the installer remotely connects via
Solution Link software.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
9-23
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
If this option is not programmed, the control panel will use the TCP IP protocol.
UDP User RAS
This option allows the control panel to communicate using the UDP internet protocol (User Datagram
Protocol) when the user remotely connects via Solution
Link software.
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit IPRS address, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IPRS Port
MENU 5-7-6
0 7 7 0 3
If this option is not programmed, the control panel will use the TCP IP protocol.
Comms > IP Remote Access >
RAS Lockout Time
MENU 5-7-3
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu allows the control panel to lockout and prevent the ability for anyone to remotely connect to the system using the RAS IP connection method. During the lockout time, (1 to 255 seconds / 0 = No Lockout), the system will not respond to any TCP IP connection requests. The lockout count is set at 6 failed attempts (fixed) over a 60 second period)
This menu is reserved for factory use. Do not change unless requested to do so. This menu must be 5 digits set with the range of 0 to 65535.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [6]. The keypad will
display the current IPRS port.
IPRS Port
07703
Press OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 32 digitencryption key, then press
[OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current IP RAS Lockout time.
RAS Lockout Time
CO M M S T E S T I N G
Comms > Comms Test >
Send Test Report
-
-
MENU 5-9-0
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new IP RAS
Lockout Time, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. Valid entires are 0 to 255 seconds
Comms > IP Remote Access >
IPRS Address
MENU 5-7-5
1 Digits 12
2 0 2 1 2 9 0 8 3 0 5 8
This menu allows you to test the reporting functions of the control panel by manually sending a Test report to the receiving party (i.e. security company monitoring station, mobile telephone etc).
1) Enter [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
prompt that it is in the process of sending a test report.
Comms Testing In
Progress ..Please Wait..
Press OK or MENU
This menu is reserved for factory use. Do not change unless requested to do so.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [7] + [5]. The keypad will
display the current IPRS address.
2) If the test is successful, the keypad will prompt:
Comms Test Successful
DNS Address
202129083058
Press OK to SAVE
Press OK or MENU
9-24
3) If the test fails, the keypad will prompt:
Test Report Failed..
Please Call For Service
Press OK or MENU
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Report Period then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Time
02:00am
Press OK to SAVE
MENU 5-9-1
Test Time
0 2 : 0 0
H H : M M
This menu programs the time of the day that the panel will send the automatic Test Report to the base station receiver. Automatic test reports are used to verify the panels ability to report events via the telephone line on an ongoing basis.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Time.
Test Report Time
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Options
1 Test If No Other Rpt
2 Test On Siren Reset
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 5-9-3
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Options.
Test If No Other Rpt
Test On Siren Reset
Reserved
Press OK ON OFF MENU
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
2) Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to
select the Test Report time required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Scroll through the hours using the up and down
arrow keys to change the time from am to pm.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Test If No Other Rpt
Setting this option will cause the system to only send its automatic Test report if no other area report has been sent within the test report time period as programmed in
MENU 5-9-2.
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Report Period
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - No Test Report
01 - Every Day
02 - Every Week
03 - Every Month
04 - Every 2 Days
05 - Every 3 Days
06 - Every 4 Days
07 - Every 5 Days
MENU 5-9-2
08 - Reserved
09 - Reserved
10 - Reserved
11 - Reserved
12 - Reserved
13 - Reserved
14 - Every Hour
15 - Every 12 Hours
0 1
Test On Siren Reset
Setting this option will delay the Automatic Test Report if the sirens are running when the test report time expires.
This effectively keeps the telco line free to make any further alarm reports which may be triggered while the sirens are running. The panel will send the cued Test
Report as soon as the siren run-time has expired.
This menu programs how often the control panel will send a test report. Only one option can be programmed.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Test Report Period.
Test Report Period
i
Note
In previous versions, the control panel would send a ‘Test Report - Auto’ SMS message whenever the control panel returned to normal state after a trouble event had been cleared.
In version 2.14, when using SMS format or GSM
SMS format, the control panel no longer sends the ‘Test Report - Auto’ message when the control panel returns to normal after trouble condition.
01 - Every Day
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
9-25
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Comms Programming
Comms > Comms Test >
Test Route
00 - Log Events Only
01 - Dest 1 + Log
02 - Dest 2 + Log
03 - Dest 1 & 2 + Log
04 - Dest 2 If 1 Fails
MENU 5-9-4
0 1
This menu programs which destination will be used to send both manual and automatic test reports.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Test Route.
Test Route
i
Note
The panel will make only one attempt to call this
number per activation. To perform multiple tests repeat the sequence. There is no need to answer the test call.
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
01 - Dest 1 + Log
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Test
Route required then Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Comms > Comms Test >
Dial Number Test
MENU 5-9-5
This option provides a quick and easy way for the Installer to test the communication path for the panel while they are onsite without the need to trigger test reports and then verify them with the base station. Once the telco wiring has been completed, enter your mobile phone or another test number into this location and press [OK]. The panel will then seize the phone line and dial the programmed number.
1) Press [MENU] + [5] + [9] + [5], then select either
PSTN or GMS communication to test the dialler if an optional GSM module has been fitted.
GSM
PSTN
Exit
Press OK or MENU
2) Use the numeric keys to enter the the test number.
You can change a single digit in the number by scrolling the cursor left or right. For special characters (eg. , = pause * or # etc), use the up and down arrow keys. To clear all text from the cursor position to the right, press the [OFF] key.
Enter Digits To Dial
Press OK to SAVE
3) Press [OK] when finished to start the test.
9-26 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 10
Device Programming
T his chapter covers the different device types and the numerous programmable options which can be used to control how a device operates.
The commands menu allows you to view the status of any device in the system and will display its condition as well as the temperature and voltage where available.
Keypads are the most common device used in the system and must be assigned to a home area if they are to operate correctly in a system. You are also able to set the contrast, backlight and beeper volume to your own personal preference.
RF Devices can also be connected to the system and from this menu you are able to set supervision times, receiver jamming, tamper options and more.
Keypad 1 Name Kp1
Graphic + Prox V2.05
Voltage = 13.87
Press OK or MENU
3) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished. i
Note
In previous versions, when selecting to view the status of the ethernet module, the status line did not include the MAC address or IP address of the CM751B ethernet module. In version 2.15, viewing the status of the ethernet module, both the MAC address and
IP addres set for the ethernet module will now be included.
Devices > Commands >
LAN Secure
MENU 6-0-1
D E V I C E CO M M A N D S
Devices > Commands >
Device Status
-
-
MENU 6-0-0
This command will allow you to view the status of any device connected to the system (except CM195 Multi RF
Receiver Module). The following information is available:
Line 1 = LAN Device and Number
Line 2 = Firmware Version
Line 3 = Voltage, Temperature & Area Assignment.
If the LAN network is secure, this will prevent the system detecting additional LAN devices when the system has been powered down, additional devices connected and powered back up again. If the LAN network is not secured, the system will automatically detect any additional devices added when the system has been powered down and then powered back up again.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [1]. If the system LAN is
not secured, the keypad will display the following.
LAN is not Secured
To Secure, Press ON
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the device in the list and press [OK]. The display will show the device status.
Kp1 Keypad 1 Name
Op1 OutputX Exp 2
Ux1 UniExpander 1
Press OK or MENU
Press OK or MENU
2) Use the ON and OFF keys to toggle LAN secure on
or off.
3) Press [OK] to exit.
2) The status line will scroll the keypad voltage,
temperature and area while the device type and firmware version number are continuously displayed.
i
Note
In previous versions, if the system LAN is secured and the panel is power cycled, then the CM751B IP
Ethernet Interface Module or CM743B 2G GSM/GPRS/
SMS Radio Module if installed would fail to restart. In this situration the LAN would need to be unsecured and then perform a LAN scan or power cycle. In version 2.15, this has been corrected.
10-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Devices > Commands >
LAN Scan
MENU 6-0-2
This menu allows the installer to rescan a non-secured
LAN network when adding or removing LAN expansion devices (eg. keypads, input modules, output modules etc), without the need to power down the control panel.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [2]. If the system LAN is
not secured, the keypad will display the following.
LAN scan has been requested. This will end your login session
....Please Wait
Scanning LAN for Devices
Please Wait ... /
Found Output Exp 2
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Volume
-
MENU 6-0-7
This menu allows you to adjust the volume of the keypad’s speaker to suit the application or customer preference.
Each keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
H
Press OK to SAVE
Devices > Commands >
LAN Watch
MENU 6-0-3
This menu allows the installer to view the number of retry packets that are being sent out on the bus on a per module basis.
The menu list is structured with the Packet Retry Count followed by Device ID then the Device Name. Simply scroll through the list with the arrow keys to view the devices.
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required volume level.
Each time a key is pressed, you will hear a beep indicating the new volume level. When finished press [OK].
i
Note
i
Note
To completely silence the keypad speaker, simply
move the slider all the way to the left. This will disable the keypad speaker for all functions including key press beeps.
In previous versions, smart card keypads failed to
display the same screen information as to older type keypads when adjusting the keypad volume settings.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
Move the cursor to the device of interest and press the
OFF key to reset the Packet Retry Count or press and hold down the OFF key to reset the Packet Retry Count for all devices.
The packet retry count is also reset on power up and continues to count upwards on an ongoing basis and once reaches the maximum of 255 will stop until manually reset.
Under normal circumstances a device should not have a large retry count but over time this is possible.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the device in the list.
001 Fp2 Keypad 1 Name
017 Kp1 Keypad 3 Name
010 Kp1 Keypad 5 Name
Press OK or MENU
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Contrast
-
MENU 6-0-8
This menu allows you to adjust the contrast of the keypad’s
LCD display to suit the application or customer preference.
Each keypad on the system can be adjusted separately.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [8] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
H
Press OK to SAVE
2) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required contrast
level. Each time a key is pressed the contrast will adjust to the new level. When finished press [OK].
i
Note
In previous versions, smart card keypads failed to
display the same screen information as to older type keypads when adjusting the keypad contrast settings. In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
10-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Devices > Commands >
Keypad Backlight
-
MENU 6-0-9
This menu allows you to adjust the brightness of the backlight on the keypad’s LCD display. Each keypad can be adjusted separately to suit the customers needs.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [0] + [9] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Area Options
MENU 6-1-2
1 All On Arming Allowed
2 Part On Arming Allowed
3 Disarming Allowed
4 Single Button Control
5 All User Areas
6 Zero Exit Time
7 PIN To Change Area
8 Home Area Only
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
H
Press
OK to
SAVE
2) Use the arrow keys to set the required backlight
level. Each time a key is pressed the backlight will adjust to the new level. When finished press [OK].
i
Note
In previous versions, smart card keypads failed to
display the same screen information as to older type keypads when adjusting the keypad backlight settings. In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
K E YPA D & R E A D E R O P T I O N S
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [2] and select the keypad
or LAN reader from the list then press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
All On Arming Allowed
Part On Arming Allowed
Disarming Allowed
Press
OK ON OFF MENU
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Name
K e y p a d 1 N a m e
-
MENU 6-1-0
This menu allows you to program the name or location description of the keypad or LAN reader.
All On Arming Allowed
Selecting this option allow the user to turn the area All
On that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned to when a valid PIN, token or fingerprint is presented. The user must have access to the area that the keypad or LAN reader has been assigned to. See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader
Area Assignment.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [0] and select the keypad
or LAN reader from the list and press [OK].
Name Kp1
Part On Arming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the user to turn the area Part
On or Part 2 On that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned to when a valid PIN, token or fingerprint is presented.
Keypad 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
To Turn Area All On Via Token
From the disarmed state, present the token once to turn the area All On.
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Reader Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 -
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
To Turn Area Part On Via Token
Present the token twice within 5 seconds to turn the area
Part On.
To Turn Area Part 2 On Via Token
Present the token three times within 5 seconds to turn the area Part 2 On.
i
Note
The control panel simultaneously supports both All
On and Part On functions for fingerprint readers by selecting both Option 1 and Option 2 in this menu.
However, this simultaneous support cannot be used when the fingerprint reader has been programmed
10-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
with badging. See below for correct operation.
All On
To turn an area All On, present your finger and remove when the reader vibrates indicating a successful read.
All User Areas
This option allows the user to turn on or off all areas that the user has been assigned to at the same time when they swipe their token or fingerpint. At the keypad, the user would simply enter their PIN and then press and hold the [ON], [PART] or [OFF] keys to turn on or off all areas they belong to.
To turn the area off, present your finger and remove when the reader vibrates indicating a successful read.
Part On
To turn the area Part On, present your finger and remove 2 seconds after the reader vibrates indicating a successful read.
i
Note
In previous versions, a keypad with a built-in reader was set with both Option 5 - All User Areas and
Option 8 - Home Area Only would restrict a PIN that has been assigned to multiple areas to operate only the console's home area. However, when the same user presents their token, the user could turn all areas they belong to All On, Part On or off.
i
Note
In previous versions, when a token user wishes to turn all areas they belong to Part On at a reader set with Option 1 - Arming Allowed, Option 2 - Part On
Arming Allowed and Option 4 - All User Areas, the token user would be required to turn all areas All On and switch to Part On.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. When a user has been assigned to multiple areas and the console has been locked to operate only its home area, a user entering their PIN or presenting their token can only operate the consoles home area.
i
Note
When the token user switches from All On to Part On, only the first area the user belongs to would switch to
Part On. All remaining areas would turn All On.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. When the area has been turned off (disarmed), a user presenting their token twice (non-badging) or presents their token 4 times (reader badging allowed
- see MENU 6-1-4), the control panel will first turn all areas the user belongs to All On. All areas will then turn off (disarm) including areas previously turned
All On before the control panel turns all areas Part
On.
When controlling single or multiple areas using the
MyAlarm SMS Control app to turn areas All On will not switch areas already Part On.
i
Note
In previous versions, a multi-area user presenting their fingerprint would only turn areas that are off
(disarmed) All On or Part On. Any area that was already turned All On or Part On would not switch state..
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. If areas that belong to a user is already turned Part On, turning all areas All On when presenting their fingerprint will also switch areas that was previously Part On to
All On. This is also applicable when the user turns all areas Part On. For areas that switch between All
On to Part On, or Part On to All On will be forced to turn off (disarm) before switching to All On or
Part On (including any exit time set for the area(s) involved).
When controlling single or multiple areas using the MyAlarm SMS Control app to turn areas Part
On will not switch areas already All On.
i
Note
When controlling single or multiple areas using the
MyAlarm SMS Control app to turn areas All On will not switch areas already Part On.
Disarming Allowed
Selecting this option allows the user to turn off (disarm) the area that the keypad or LAN reader is assigned to when a valid PIN, token or fingerprint presented. The user must have access to the area that the keypad or LAN reader has been assigned to. See MENU 1-6-1 — Reader
Area Assignment.
Single Button Control
This option allows single key arming (All On or Part On) and single key disarming (from Part On or Part 2 On) when using the keypad. Refer to programming areas for respective options set per area.
i
Note
In version 2.15, a fingerprint reader can now be used to arm or disarm all user areas if required. A fingerprint user now has the ability to turn all areas they belong to All On, Part On or Off when they present their fingerprint at the reader when Option 5
- All User Areas are set in MENU 6-1-2. The following two tables outline door control with both non badging and badging operations.
10-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Area Is All On
Present Finger Once
Non Badging
=
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Home Area Only
Setting this option will force the keypad to display only it’s assigned home area information. Therefore a user cannot toggle (or move) the keypad display to show that of a different area when the system has been partitioned.
Area Is Part On
Present Finger Once
Area Is All On
Present Finger Once
=
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas i
Note
In previous versions, a multi-area user operating a keypad with a built-in proximity reader was restricted to only operate the home area of the console when using their PIN, but could turn all areas they belong to All On, Part On or off (disarm).
Area Is Off
Present Finger Once
Present Finger and Hold
=
=
Open Door +
Turns On All User Areas
Opens Door +
Turns Part On All User Areas
Table 26: Fingerprint - Non Badging Examples
Area Is Part On
Badging Allowed
=
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. A multi-area user operating any console (keypad or reader) can only operate the home area that the console has been locked to.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Home Area
MENU 6-1-3
0 1
00 - No Area
01 - Security System
02 - Area 2 Name
03 - Area 3 Name
04 - Area 4 Name
05 - Area 5 Name
06 - Area 6 Name
07 - Area 7 Name
08 - Area 8 Name
Present Finger Once =
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
Area Is Off
Present Finger Once = Open Door
Present Finger and Hold =
Opens Door +
Turns On All User Areas
Table 27: Fingerprint - Non Badging Examples
Zero Exit Time
Selecting this option allow the user to turn the area All
On or Part On/Part 2 On from the keypad or LAN reader with no exit time. i
Note
In previous versions, if a PIN is used to turn an area
All On or Part On and the console was set with zero exit time, the control panel would ingore the console setting and would still follow the area exit time set in
MENU 2-8-0 (default = 60 seconds). Turning an area
All On or Part On via a token or fingerprint at a reader set for zero exit time would turn on without exit
delay. In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
PIN To Change Area
Setting this option will prevent a user from switching between different areas on the keypad unless they enter a valid user PIN.
When this option is not set, users will be able to change the keypad view to all other areas in the system regardless of whether or not they have access to those areas.
This menu allows you to assign each keypad or LAN reader to a default home area (Area 1 to 8). Only 1 home area can be programmed for each keypad or LAN reader.
If a user toggles the keypad display to view a different area, the keypad will automatically timeout and move back to the home area if no key is pressed for a period of
60 seconds.
To prevent users from viewing areas which they do not have access to, you will need to enable the PIN
To Change Area option. Setting this option will set the system to request a user’s PIN before allowing them to view another area. The system will only allow a user to view the areas they have access to.
See MENU 6-1-4 — Keypad General Options.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK]. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Home Area required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Home Area Kp1
i
Note
01 - Security System
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Each keypad must be set to a unique address via the
DIP switches on the keypad and each keypad must have a home area programmed to operate correctly.
Area 1 is the default home area for all keypads.
10-5
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming i
Note
In previous versions, when two different keypads are in programming mode and the installer changes the home area of the other keypad to 00 - No Area, after saving the changes and exiting programming mode would not allow a user to turn an area All On or Part On from either keypad. The keypad would display a message indicating that the control panel is still in programming mode. A power cycle would be required before the control panel will allow a user to turn an area on and off again.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
Enable Rear Tamper
This option allows the tamper circuit located on the back of the LAN device to function. As soon as the LAN device has been removed from the wall, the control panel will register an alarm event..
i
Note
In previous versions, if the home area of the fingerprint reader was set to 00 - No Area, entering programming mode and programming the fingerprint reader to follow an area (eg. Area 1 etc), after saving the changes and exiting programming mode, the status of the green and red LED's may not update. Therefore a power cycle would be required before both the green and red LED's would display the correct area status.
For this option to work, the keypad model being used must have the on-board tamper switch fitted.
Report Temperature
This option allows the control panel to report temperature high and low alarm reports when the temperature at the LAN device falls below or increases outside the global temperature settings in MENU 7-7-3.
i
Note
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
In previous versions, when a keypad is set with no home area, users could not use the left arrow key to toggle to the last area configured on the system.
Users would be forced to move forward to the first available area (eg Area 1) before being allowed to toggle the area display backwards.
Installer Allowed
This option allows the installer to access to the the system menus or to turn the aea (or system) on or off at
LAN device.
Show Alarm When Armed
This option allows the keypad to display which zone registered an alarm. If multiple zones have registered an alarm, the keypad will scroll each zone one at a time.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
General Options
MENU 6-1-4
If the option is programmed, the keypad will display as below:
1 Enable Rear Tamper
2 Report Temperature
3 Installer PIN Allowed
4 Show Alarm When Armed
5 Reader Area Control
6 Reader Badging
7 Enable Egress Input
8 Log Egress Events
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
Security System
ALARM
Alarm Zone 1 Name
If the option is not programmed, the keypad will display as below:
Security System
The above options can be configured independantly for each keypad fitted to the system.
ALARM
Sat 06-Jan-2015 7:03pm
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [4] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Enable Rear Tamper
Report Temperature
Installer PIN Allowed
Press OK ON OFF MENU
Reader Area Control
This option allows the user to control the alarm area as well as access at the same time. Turning this option off would make the console a pure access only device.
Reader Badging
This option allows the user to unlock a door (via Doors) and also turn on or off an area from the same LAN reader independently.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I 10-6
Area Is All On
Swipe Token Once
No Badging
Open Door +
Disarm Area
Badging Required
Open Door +
Disarm Area
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Badging Allowed
Area Is All On
Present Finger Once =
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
Area Is Off
Swipe Token Once
Swipe Token 3
Times Within 5
Seconds
Swipe Token 4
Times Within 5
Seconds
Open Door +
Turn Area All On
Open Door
Open Door +
Turn Area All On
Open Door +
Turn Area All On,
Switches To Part On
Area Is Part On
Present Finger Once
Area Is Off
Present Finger Once
=
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
= Open Door
Table 28: Badging Examples
Present Finger and Hold =
Opens Door +
Turns On All User Areas
Table 30: Fingerprint - Non Badging Examples
i
Note
In version 2.15, a fingerprint reader can now be used to arm or disarm all user areas if required. A fingerprint user now has the ability to turn all areas they belong to All On, Part On or Off when they present their fingerprint at the reader when Option 5
- All User Areas are set in MENU 6-1-2. The following two tables outline door control with both non badging and badging operations.
Enable Egress Input
this option when selected will enable the egress input on the rear of the control console. Where the console is then assigned to a door triggering this input will then trigger the door to operate for the programmed time thus allowing access.
Area Is All On
Present Finger Once
Non Badging
=
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
Log Egress Events
There can be many Egress events per day on an access control system which can clutter the history log over time. If you enable the Log Egress Events option then the egress events are recorded into the history log for later review.
Area Is Part On
Present Finger Once =
Open Door +
Turns Off All User Areas
Area Is Off
Present Finger Once
Present Finger and Hold
=
=
Open Door +
Turns On All User Areas
Opens Door +
Turns Part On All User Areas
Table 29: Fingerprint - Non Badging Examples
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Indicator Options
1 Extinguish
2 Greetings
3 Display Temperature
4 Display Area Icons
5 Trouble Alert Beeps
6 Entry Exit Warning
7 Part Exit Warning
8 Chime Tone
MENU 6-1-5
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
This menu allows you to program various options for each LAN keypad, LAN reader or LAN fingerprint reader.
Keypads that have an in-built proximity reader, the parameters set when selecting the keypad is common for both the keypad and in-built reader.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [5] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
Extinguish
Greetings
Display Temperature
Press OK ON OFF MENU
10-7
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Extinguish
This option allows the LAN device (eg. keypad, proximity reader or fingerprint reader) to automatically turn off all key backlighting and status LED's when there is no activity for approximately 4 minutes. As soon as an alarm occurs or user activity on the LAN device, the backlighting and/or status LED's will return to normal.
i
Note
In previous versions, external metal keypads would not display the green and/or red LED status on the first key press when keypad extinguish mode is active.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
Trouble Alert Beeps
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity reader or fingerprint reader) to sound a trouble tone when the system has detected a trouble condition.
Entry Exit Warning
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the entry warning tone or sound the exit warning tone when a user turns an area All On.
Greetings
This option allows the keypad to breifly display on the top line the greeting message when a user turns an area on or off.
When turning an area All On, Part On or Part 2 On, the greeting message 'Goodbye' along with their user name on the second line will be displayed:
Goodbye
Mary Smith
Security System ON
When turning an area off from All On, Part On or Part 2
On, the greeting message will by displayed on the top line along with their user name on the second line.
The following greeting messages are as follows:
Good Morning Greeting = 00:00 to 11:59
Good Afternoon Greeting = 12:00 to 17:59
Good Evening Greeting = 18:00 to 23:59
Good Morning
Mary Smith
Security System OFF
Display Temperature
This option allows the keypad to display the reading of the keypad temperature when a keypad idle screen has been programmed. Each keypad can display its own temperature.
Display Area Icons
TThis option allows the keypad to display the area icons
1 to 8. This allows the users to determine which areas are turned All On or Part On from a single keypad without the need to either move the keypad display to view each area or walk to each area keypad.
Security System
DISARMED
Thu,Jan,05 11:22 am 22ºC
Part Exit Warning
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the exit warning tone when a user turns the area Part On or Part 2 On.
If this option is not programmed, the keypad will only sound a single beep at the end of the part exit time.
Chime Tone
This option allows the LAN device (keypad, proximity reader or fingerprint reader) to sound the chime tone when a a zone set to be monitored when chime mode is turned on is faulted. If this option is not programmed, the LAN device will not sound the chime tone when a chime zone is faulted.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Emergency Keys
MENU 6-1-6
1 Audible Keypad Fire
2 Report Keypad Fire
3 Audible Keypad Medical
4 Report Keypad Medical
5 Audible Keypad Panic
6 Report Keypad Panic
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
The above options can be configured independantly for each keypad fitted to the system.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad in the list then press [OK].
10-8 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Audible Keypad Fire
Report Keypad Fire
Audible Keypad Medical
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Figure 26: Keypad Emergency Keys
Labelling can be applied to the keypad to further simplify operation.
Audible Keypad Fire
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad. To initiate a fire emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [4] + [6] keys or the [
←] +
[
→] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to reset the alarm condition.
KEYPAD EMERGENCY ALARM TRIGGER’S
Key Sequence
[
←] + [→] Hold for 2 seconds
[
→] + [↑] Hold for 2 seconds
[
↑] + [↓] Hold for 2 seconds
Event Triggered
Keypad Fire Alarm
Keypad Panic Alarm
Keypad Medical Alarm
Table 31: Keypad Emergency Keys
Report Keypad Fire
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Fire report to the base station when a Keypad Fire Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
i
Note
In previous versions, the hold down emergency alarm functions using the arrow keys failed to operate when initiated using graphic keypads that have built-in smart card readers. This included keypad fire, keypad panic and keypad medical emergency alarms.
Audible Kpad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a Keypad Medical Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad. To initiate a medical emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [7] + [9] keys or the [
↑] + [↓] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user PIN to reset the alarm condition.
Report Kpad Medical
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Medical report to the base station when a Keypad Medical
Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
Audible Kpad Panic
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an audible alarm when a Keypad Panic Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad. To initiate a panic emergency via the keypad, press and hold the [1] + [3] keys or the
[
→] + [↑] keys down for two seconds. Enter a valid user
PIN to reset the alarm condition.
i
Note
If this option is disabled, a keypad panic alarm will
not be visible on the keypad display (i.e. Invisible
Panic Alarm).
Report Keypad Panic
Setting this option allows the panel to send a Panic report to the base station when a Keypad Panic
Emergency Alarm has been triggered via the keypad.
In version 2.14, the hold down emergency functions using the arrow keys now function correctly.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Door Assignment
MENU 6-1-7
0 0
00 - No Door Assignment
01 - Door 1 Name
02 - Door 2 Name
03 - Door 3 Name
04 - Door 4 Name
05 - Door 5 Name
06 - Door 6 Name
07 - Door 7 Name
08 - Door 8 Name
09 - Door 9 Name
10 - Door 10 Name
11 - Door 11 Name
12 - Door 12 Name
13 - Door 13 Name
14 - Door 14 Name
15 - Door 15 Name
16 - Door 16 Name
This menu allows the installer to assign each keypad to a single door group. 16 different door groups are available.
Programming a door group of zero (disabled) allows a user from any door assignment to operate the keypad.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the keypad or LAN reader in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the keypad or LAN reader number directly and press [OK]. The keypad will display the current door assignment setting.
10-9
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Door Assignment Kp1
00 - No Door Assignment
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrows to select the door
assignment that you want to assign the keypad or
LAN reader to.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
MENU 6-1-8
Wi-Fi Signal Indicators
A brief description of the options available are listed below.
For more information refer to the Wi-Fi Enabled Keypad IRG.
Devices > Keypads & Readers >
Lockout Time
SSID Scan
This option will request the system to create a list of all
SSID’s currently in range of the Wi-Fi keypad. Use the down arrow key to step through the available SSID’s and press OK to select the required station.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
0 6 0
Seconds
This menu programs how long a keypad will be quarantined if the PIN retry count value is exceeded.
See MENU 1-5-1 — PIN Retry Count. The PIN retry counter is reset when any area is armed or disarmed using a valid PIN.
The SSID scan also displays the signal strength for each station in dB’s (Decibels). To ensure reliable Wi-Fi performance do not attempt to connect the keypad the a station with a signal strength lower than -65dB.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [1] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current keypad lockout time.
Lockout Time
i
Note
The lower the number the better the signal strength is. For example -25dB is better than -55dB. If the signal strength for the required station is higher than -65dB you should consider relocating the keypad or using a Wi-Fi range extender.
060 Seconds
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
SSID
This option allows the installer or master user to manually enter the required SSID. This typically will need to be dont the the SSID is not being broadcast by the wireless access point.
2) Use the numeric keys to program the number of
seconds the keypad will be locked out for. Valid entries are 0 - 255, 0 = No Lockout.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit, else press [MENU] to
exit without saving.
Devices > Keypads And Readers > Wi-Fi Settings
Wi-Fi Settings
-
MENU 6-1-9
Security
From the list select the Wi-Fi Security option currently in use on the customers wireless access point. If you perform a SSID Scan (see above), the control panel will automatically detect the security option required and you wont need to set this option.
Password
Enter the customers Wi-Fi access password.
SSID Scan
SSID
Security
Password
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Address
IP Options
This menu option is only available when the system detects that a WiFi enabled keypad is installed on the system.
IP Address
If the customer site is using DHCP there is no need to enter anything in this location. If you are not using
DHCP then you should enter the assigned IP address for the Wi-Fi keypad here. You will also need to enter the
Subnet Mask and Default Gateway addresses.
Subnet Mask
Only enter when not using DHCP.
Default Gateway
Only enter when not using DHCP.
Wi-Fi Enabled keypads include two new symbols which indicate the connection state between the keypad and the customers wireless access point. A Wi-Fi symbol will be displayed on the keypad display after the system has logged onto your local Wi-Fi network.
10-10
MAC Address
This location is read only and cannot be changed. The
MAC address of the Wi-Fi keypad is displayed here.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
IP Options
Various IP options can be configured to allow the system to display and or report IP related fault conditions.
Display Faults
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a trouble condition if the control panel detects Wi-Fi Keypad’s IP address has changed, if there is no IP connection, if there is an IP lockout or an IP conflict.
Report Network Lost
Setting this option allows the control panel to report when it detects that the Wi-Fi keypad can no longer detect a Wi-Fi signal from the local wireless access point.
Report IP Conflict
This option allows the control panel to report an IP conflict via the dialler when it detects two computers on the LAN or internet have been assigned the same IP address.
Report Poll Fail
This option allows the control panel to report via the dialler when the Wi-Fi keypad fails to send a poll to the base station.
Report Module Missing
This option when set allows the control panel to send a trouble report when the control panel detects that the ethernet module is missing or when the module is rebooting for any reason. A restore report will be sent when the control panel detects that the module has returned to normal.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
R F R E C E I V E R O P T I O N S
Devices > RF Devices >
Receiver Options
MENU 6-2-0
1 Display RF Rcvr Trouble
2 Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
3 Report RF Rcvr Tamper
4 Alarm RF Rcvr Jamming
5 Report RF Rcvr Jamming
6 Alarm Rcvr Comms Fail
7 Report Rcvr Comm Fail
8 Reserved
This menu option allows you to configure the various RF receiver functions. Only one RF reciever can be fitted per panel.
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current receiver options.
Display RF Rcvr Trouble
Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display RF Rcvr Trouble
Setting this option allows the panel to display a trouble condition on the keypad when an RF receiver fail condition occurs.
Alarm RF Rcvr Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to trigger an alarm when the RF receiver tamper circuit is tripped.
Report RF Rcvr Tamper
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Tamper report to the the base station when the
RF receiver tamper circuit is tripped. A restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit is resealled.
Alarm RF Rcvr Jamming
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when the RF Receiver detects a jamming signal.
This signal may not be provided by all compatible RF
Receivers.
Report RF Rcvr Jamming
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Jam report to the base station when the RF
Receiver detects a jamming signal. A restore report will be sent as soon as the jamming signal stops.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
10-11
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Alarm Rcvr Comm Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when it is unable to communicate with the RF Receiver.
Report Rcvr Comm Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to send an RF
Receiver Comms Fail report to the base station when the panel is unable to communicate with the RF Receiver. A restore report will be sent as soon as communication is restored between the panel and the RF receiver.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current RF Device Options.
Display RF Tamper
Report RF Tamper
Report RF Low Battery
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Device > RF Devices >
Supervision Time
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 6-2-1
0 2 4
HOURS
This menu sets the global RF supervision time for all RF devices connected to the system.
Display RF Tamper
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display the
RF zone when a tamper condition occurs.
RF transmitters (sensor devices) will send a supervisory test signal approximately once every hour. The RF receiver expects to receive this supervisory signal from every transmitting device within the supervision time period.
The panel will send a Missing report to the base station for any RF device that fails to report within the supervision time.
i
Note
In previous versions, there was no provision for a silent local RF Panic emergency which was requested by installers for pseudo nurse call functionality.
If both Option 6 - Audible Keyfob Panic and Option
7 - Report Panic in MENU 6-2-2 were disabled, the bell icon would display, however, the status line on the keypad would fail to indicate which user initiated the
RF keyfob panic emergency.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RF supervision time.
Supervision Time
024 Hours
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
In version 2.19, when Option 1 - Display RF Tamper is enabled (default) the keypad will display which user initiated the local RF Panic emergency on the status line provided that both Option 6 - Audible
Keyfob Panic and Option 7 - Report Keyfob Panic have been disabled in MENU 6-2-2.
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the number of hours
for the RF supervision time. Valid times are 0 - 255 hours, 0 = No Supervision.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Report RF Tamper
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an RF
Device Faulted report to the base station when the devices tamper curcuit is tripped. A restore report will be sent when the tamper circuit is resealled.
Device > RF Devices >
RF Device Options
1 Display RF Tamper
2 Report RF Tamper
3 Report RF Low Battery
4 Report Lost RF Devices
5 Open Zone On Lost RF
6 Audible Keyfob Panic
7 Report Keyfob Panic
8 Keyfob Func Part On
This menu option allows you to configure various options and functions for RF devices connected to the system.
10-12
MENU 6-2-2
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Report RF Low Battery
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report to the base station when the RF device signals to the panel that it has a low battery condition.
Report Lost RF Devices
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a report to the base station if the panel detects that an RF device is missing.
Open Zone On Lost RF
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a zone fault on the keypad for any RF devices that are missing
Audible Keyfob Panic
Setting this option allows users who have RF keyfobs to
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
trigger an audible panic alarm via the keyfob.
Report Keyfob Panic
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Panic report to the base station when a panic alarm has been initiated via a key fob.
Keyfob Func Part On
Setting this option will allow keyfob users to arm an area or all areas of the system using function key 1 on the keyfob.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
S E R I A L D E V I C E O P T I O N S
Devices > Serial Device >
Device Type
MENU 6-3-0
00 - Disabled
01 - Serial Printer
02 - Computer
0 0
This menu sets the type of serial device that the panel will be connected to.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current device type.
Device Type
Devices > RF Devices >
Add RF Keypad
MENU 6-2-3
00 - Disabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Reserved for future use.
Delete RF Keypad
MENU 6-2-4
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Device Type required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Reserved for future use.
View RF Device ID
Waiting for Trigger!
Press OK or MENU
MENU 6-2-5
This command allows you to trap and view a transmitters
I.D. number when it has been forgotten or it is no longer legible on the transmitter label. The device being tested must be compatible with the RF receiver fitted to the panel.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [2] + [5]. The system will then
begin waiting for a valid trigger signal.
Devices > Serial Device >
Baud Rate
00 - No Device Conn
01 - 300 Baud
02 - 600 Baud
03 - 1200 Baud
04 - 2400 Baud
05 - 9600 Baud
06 - 19200 Baud
MENU 6-3-1
0 0
This menu sets the baud rate or speed that the panel will send data to the serial device. This should be set to the same baud rate as the serial device.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current baud rate.
Baud Rate
00 - No Device Conn
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Trigger the transmitter by pressing any button on
the keyfob or by triggering the tamper switch on any sensor.
Type = Keyfob
Ur1 User 1 Name
RFiD = 123456789
Press OK or MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Baud
Rate required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
3) To test another transmitter, repeat step 2. A beep
will be heard each time a new RFID is received and the new number will be displayed.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
10-13
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
SMS Control Commands
Description
Arming / Disarming Areas
Turning Area 1 On
Turning Area 1 On With Confirmation
Turning Area 1 Part 1 On
Turning Area 1 Part 1 On With Confirmation
Turning Area 1 Part 2 On
Turning Area 1 Part 2 On With Confirmation
Turn Multiple Areas On
Turn All Areas On That the User Belongs To
Turning Area 1 OFF
Turning Area 1 OFF With Confirmation
Check Area Status
Check Status Of Multiple Areas
SMS String
<User Code>,AREA,1,ON
<User Code>,AREA,1,ON,CONFIRM
<User Code>,AREA,1,PART 1
<User Code>,AREA,1,PART 1,CONFIRM
<User Code>,AREA,1,PART 2
<User Code>,AREA,1,PART 2,CONFIRM
<User Code>,AREA,1,2,3,4,ON
<User Code>,AREA,ON
<User Code>,AREA,1,OFF
<User Code>,AREA,1,OFF,CONFIRM
<User Code>,AREA,1,STATUS
<User Code>,AREA,1,2,3,STATUS
Turning Outputs On/Off
Turn Output 1 On
Turn Output 1 On With Confirmation
Turn Multiple Outputs On
Turn Multiple Outputs On With Confirmation
Turning Output 1 OFF
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,ON
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,ON,CONFIRM
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,2,3,4,ON
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,2,3,4,ON,CONFIRM
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,OFF
Turning Output 1 OFF With Confirmation
Turning Multiple Outputs OFF
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,OFF,CONFIRM
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,2,3,4,OFF
Turning Multiple Outputs OFF With Confirmation <User Code>,OUTPUT,1,2,3,4,OFF,CONFIRM
Check Output Status
Check Status Of Multiple Outputs
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,STATUS
<User Code>,OUTPUT,1,2,3,4,STATUS
Locking and Unlocking Doors
Unlock Door 1
Unlock Door 1 With Confirmation
Unlock Multiple Doors
Unlock Multiple Doors With Confirmation
Lock Door 1
Lock Door 1 With Confirmation
Lock Multiple Doors
Lock Multiple Doors With Confirmation
Check Status Of A Door
Check Status Of Multiple Doors
<User Code>,DOOR,1,UNLOCK
<User Code>,DOOR,1,UNLOCK,CONFIRM
<User Code>,DOOR,1,2,3,UNLOCK
<User Code>,DOOR,1,2,3,UNLOCK,CONFIRM
<User Code>,DOOR,1,LOCK
<User Code>,DOOR,1,LOCK,CONFIRM
<User Code>,DOOR,1,2,3,LOCK
<User Code>,DOOR,1,2,3,LOCK,CONFIRM
<User Code>,DOOR,1,STATUS
<User Code>,DOOR,1,2,3,STATUS
Check Current SIM Balance <UserCode>,SIMBAL,<Access Number>,<Text.,
<Preamble>,<Min Amount>,<Days>,<Mobile>,<Expire
Reminder>
Table 32: SMS Control Commands
i
Note
In version 2.19, changes have been made to improve the speed the system responds to SMS control messages especially
when the confirmation request option is set.
10-14 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Devices > Serial Device >
Flow Control
00 - No Handshake
01 - Hardware
02 - Xon/Xoff
MENU 6-3-2
0 0
This menu sets the appropriate flow control for the device you are connecting the serial board to. The flow control method must be the same on both devices for a serial connection to be established.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current flow control setting.
Flow Control
00 - No Handshake
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE i
Note
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
In previous versions, checking the GSM module status
using MENU 6-0-0 via Device Status or MENU 6-5-
0 via GSM/GPRS Status, the keypad would display the signal strength in dBm as shown in the example below:
GSM/GPRS 2G Module Gi1
Signal Strength -83dBm
Press
OK or MENU
In version 2.14, when checking the GSM module status, the signal strength indication has changed to signal level with a range of 0 to 5 where 0 = no signal level, 1 = low signal level and 5 = highest signal level as shown in the example below:
GSM/GPRS 2G Module Gi1
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the Flow
Control required then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Signal Level (0-5) = 2
Press
OK or MENU
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
GSM/GPRS Status
-
MENU 6-5-0
This command interrogates the GSM module and displays infomration about the radio and the SIM installed. The first line is a heading which indicates the
GSM module type that is installed. Typical information available is details on the installed radio, the SIM provider and signal strength of the currently active SIM. Is should be noted that the use of SIM 2 is restricted to reporting protocols that utilise the dual sim where SIM 2 is a backup.
GSM/GPRS 2G Module Gi1
<Scroll Parameters Hers>
Press
OK or MENU
The following parameters will be scrolled one at time through the display.
IEMI=19327130710103097
Radio Model=SL6087
Radio Firmware=Rev 1.96
Radio S/N=If this is available not sure
Provider=Sim1 YES Optus or Sim2 YES Optus
Signal Strength= Sim1 10dB or Sim2 11 dB
Dual Sims Detected
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
GSM/GPRS Options
1 Auto Forward SMS
2 Forward SMS To Mail
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 6-5-1
This menu option allows you to configure various options and functions for GSM or GPRS devices connected to the system.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current RF Device Options.
Auto Forward SMS
Forward SMS To Mail
Reserved
Press OK ON OFF MENU
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
10-15
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Auto Forward SMS
Any SMS received by the GSM module will be automatically forwarded to the mobile telephone number programmed in MENU 6-5-7.
Trigger Table 1 Phone 1
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Forward SMS To Mail
Any SMS received by the GSM module will be automatically forwarded to the keypad (brings up
Main icon). SMs commands will be filtered (eg. PIN,
AREA1,ON).
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
CLI Trigger Table 1
1 Digits
-
MENU 6-5-5-0
16
Phone 1
1 Digits 16
Phone 2
1 Digits 16
Phone 3
1 Digits 16
Phone 4
1 Digits 16
Phone 5
1 Digits 16
Phone 6
1 Digits 16
Phone 7
1 Digits 16
Phone 8
1 Digits 16
Phone 9
1 Digits 16
Phone 10
GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The CLI trigger table allows you to program up to 10 telephone numbers that the control panel will automatically identify when you call the control panel to operate an output - see Output Event type 71. Program the output event assignment as 1 so that the output follows CLI trigger table 1.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [5] + [0]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone 1=
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Press OK or MENU
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the CLI table,
otherwise press [MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
The control panel is only required to match part
of the CLI telephone number programmed to the number of the incoming call.
Example
If the programmed CLI telephone number is
0296721777, the control panel would only be required to match part of the telephone number
(eg. 96721777) to answer the incoming call.
Do not enter international or domestic prefixes when entering CLI numbers.
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
CLI Trigger Table 2
1 Digits
-
MENU 6-5-5-1
16
Phone 1
1 Digits 16
Phone 2
1 Digits 16
Phone 3
1 Digits 16
Phone 4
1 Digits 16
Phone 5
1 Digits 16
Phone 6
1 Digits 16
Phone 7
1 Digits 16
Phone 8
1 Digits 16
Phone 9
1 Digits 16
Phone 10
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI trigger, then press [OK] to select.
(GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The CLI trigger table allows you to program up to 10 telephone numbers that the control panel will automatically identify when you call the control panel to operate an output - see Output Event
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I 10-16
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming type 71. Program the output event assignment as 2 so that the output follows CLI trigger table 2.Enter [MENU] +
[6] + [5] + [5] + [1]. The keypad will display the following:
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
SMS Control
-
MENU 6-5-6
1 Digits 16
Phone 1=
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Press OK or MENU
Phone 1
Phone 2
1 Digits 16
1 Digits 16
5) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
program for CLI trigger, then press [OK] to select.
Trigger Table 2 Phone 1
Phone 3
Phone 4
1 Digits 16
1 Digits 16
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Phone 5
1 Digits 16
6) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
Phone 6
1 Digits 16
Phone 7
1 Digits 16
7) Press [OK] to save and return to the CLI table,
otherwise press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Phone 8
1 Digits 16
i
Note
The control panel is only required to match part
of the CLI telephone number programmed to the number of the incoming call.
Example
If the programmed CLI telephone number is
0296721777, the control panel would only be required to match part of the telephone number (eg.
96721777) to answer the incoming call.
Do not enter international or domestic prefixes when entering CLI numbers.
Phone 9
1 Digits 16
Phone 10
(GSM MODULE REQUIRED) The SMS control table allows you to program up to 10 telphone numbers that the control panel will automatically identify when you send
SMS commands to operate the control panel.
1) Enter [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [6]. The keypad will
display the following:
Phone 1=
Phone 2=
Phone 3=
Press OK or MENU
2) Highlight the telephone number that you want to
restrict for SMS control, then press [OK] to select.
SMS Control Phone 1
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
3) Using the numeric keys, enter the telephone
number that you wish to program.
4) Press [OK] to save and return to the restrict SMS
control table, otherwise press [MENU] to exit without saving.
10-17
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
APN Server Name
MENU 6-5-7
APN (Access Point Name)
Enter the appropriate name of your 3G/4G GPRS mobile network provider to connect to the public
Internet. For example Telstra APN=Telstra.wap, Optus
APN=yesinternet, Vodafone APN=live.vodafone.com
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
APN Password
MENU 6-5-9
A secret word or phrase that must be used to gain admission to the network however mostly left BLANK.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [7] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the GSM/GPRS module in the list then press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the APN server name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the
[OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
APN Server Name Gi1
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [9] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the GSM/GPRS module in the list then press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the APN password is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
APN Password Gi1
Press OK to SAVE
Press OK to SAVE i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Module IP Address
MENU 6-6-0
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Devices > GSM/GPRS Module >
APN Username
MENU 6-5-8
This can be used to identify you on a network however is mostly left BLANK.
This is the IP address of the TCP/IP module on the customer’s internal local area network.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current IP address.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [5] + [8] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the GSM/GPRS module in the list then press [OK].
2) Use the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the APN username is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
APN Username Gi1
Module IP Address
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the IP Address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Press OK to SAVE
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Subnet Mask
MENU 6-6-1
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 —
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
The can be found by running IPCONFIG on a PC connected to the clients network. Typical subnet mask is
255.255.255.0.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current subnet mask.
10-18 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Subnet Mask
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit subnet mask number, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Default Gateway
MENU 6-6-2
1 Digits 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The can be found by running IPCONFIG on a PC connected to the clients network.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current gateway number.
Default Gateway
000000000000
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Ethernet Options
1 Display Faults
2 Report Network Lost
3 Report IP Conflict
4 Report Poll Fail
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Report Module Missing
MENU 6-6-9
This menu option allows you to configure the various RF receiver functions. Only one RF reciever can be fitted per panel.
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
1) Enter your Installer PIN + [MENU].
2) Enter [6] + [6] + [9] + [OK].
The keypad will display the current options which are selected or enabled.
Display Faults
Report Cable Lost
Report IP Conflict
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the 12 digit gateway number, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Devices > Ethernet Module >
Module MAC Address
MENU 6-6-3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This is the hardware machine address of the module and can be found on the bar-coded sticker.
1) Press [MENU] + [6] + [6] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current MAC address.
Module MAC Address
000000000000
Press OK to SAVE
3) Use the numeric keys [1] to [8] to turn on and off
the features as required. When the corresponding number on the keypad is on then the option is selected.
4) When all options are programmed, press [OK] to
save and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Faults
This option allows the keypad to display a trouble condition if the control panel detects when the ethernet module is missing, the module IP is changed, there is no connection, there is an IP lockout or there is an IP conflict.
Report Network Lost
This option allows the control panel to report when it detects that the LAN cable to the ethernet module is missing or the WiFi keypad can no longer detect a WiFi signal from the local WiFi router.
2) Use the numeric keys [0] to [9] + [
←] and [→] keys
to program the MAC address, then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving. This is the hardware machine address of the module and can be found on the bar-coded sticker.
Report IP Conflict
This option allows the control panel to report an IP conflict via the dialler when it detects two computers on the LAN or internet have been assigned the same IP address.
Report Poll Fail
This option allows the control panel to report via the dialler when the ethernet module fails to send a poll to the base station.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
10-19
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Device Programming i
Note
In previous versions, IP Poll Fail and restore events
would report back to base using an incorrect Point
ID.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected. An IP Poll Fail event will include Point ID 901 to identify Destination
1 and Point ID 902 to identify Destination 2.
i
Note
In previous versions, the control panel failed to send
poll fail and restore events. Therefore, if the control panel fails to poll to the base station and if test reports are disabled, the base station would not receive events from the control panel when communication has restored to indicate a previous communications trouble condition.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
Report Module Missing
This option allows the control panel to report when it detects that the ethernet module is missing during reboot or removed.
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
10-20 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 11
System Programming
T his section contains the different parameters required that are system related features.
The commands menu will allow you to view the panel status, system troubles, history log, factory default and entering service mode.
Some of the key parameters in these menus are the setting of the date/time under Clock and Schedules which control all the automated time functions of the system.
S YS T E M CO M M A N D S
System > Commands >
Panel Status
This command displays the following panel related information on the keypad display.
Line 1 Displays:
The panel number that you are getting information from
(eg. Node 1 = Panel 1 etc). The Solution 6000 is only configured to work with one panel.
Line 2 Displays:
The panel name and firmware version number.
Line 3 Displays:
The current panel temperature, panel power supply voltage and any system troubles which are in effect. This line scrolls all events continiously
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [0] to view the panel
status.
Panel 1
Solution 6000 Ver 2.00.00
Temperature = 33
Press OK or MENU
-
-
MENU 7-0-0
System > Commands >
System Trouble
-
-
MENU 7-0-1
This command lists any system troubles which are currently in effect on the system. Information is diplayed in a list format allowing you to select a paticular event and then drill down to view more specific information.
System trouble events such as Failure To Comminicate or
Telco Line Fail are grouped under System Trouble in the list while open zones are displayed individually one per line.
When the keypad is in standby mode, system troubles and open zones will be displayed on the status line of the keypad. From this mode you can access the list of troubles by pressing the down arrow.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the trouble event in the list then press [OK].
System Trbl
Zn1 Zone 1 Name
Zn2 Zone 2 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Selecting System Trouble from the list will show the
specific panel version information to be displayed in the first two lines while the third line of the display will scroll all current system trouble events.
Panel 1
Solution 6000 Ver 2.00.00
Date and Time
Press OK or MENU
2) Press [OK] to exit when finished.
3) Selecting a Zone from the list will show the currrent
zone state.
Zone 1 Zame Zn1
EOL=Open 53020 ohms
Press OK or MENU
4) If no System Troubles are in effect the keypad will
display.
11-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
There are no
System troubles
Case Tamper
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the tamper circuit on the RF receiver is faulted.
Press OK or MENU
5) Press [OK] or [MENU] when finished.
S YS T E M T R O U B L E M E S S AG E S
The following list shows the systems trouble messages including a description of what has caused the trouble event to occur. System Trouble events are also recorded in the System Event Log.
Receiver Jam
This trouble message will display if the connected RF receiver detects RF noise levels that may prevent it from working correctly.
Comms Fail Route1
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send pending reports to Destination 1. All possible call attempts will be made before the trouble message is displayed.
Power Missing
This trouble message will display when the AC mains power supply to the panel is disconnected or failled and will clear when the power is reconnected. The Mains
Power Icon in the keypad will also flash when the power is missing.
Comms Fail Route2
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send pending reports to Destination 2. All possible call attempts will be made before the trouble message is displayed.
AC Missing
The control panel has detected that the AC mains supply has failed or is disconnected on an optional universal expander or LAN power supply module.
Comms Fail Route3
This trouble message will display if the panel has failed to send pending reports to Destination 3 (Email). All possible call attempts will be made before the trouble message is displayed.
Battery Low
This trouble message will display if the panel’s backup battery voltage has dropped below 11.5 volts DC during a battery test and will clear when the voltage is above
12.5 volts during a subsequent battery test.
Sensor Watch Alert
The control panel has detected a zone has failed to detect a change of state within the sensor watch period.
Battery Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the system’s backup battery is missing or has been disconnected.
Comms BUSS Trble
This trouble message will display if the panel failed to communicate to a system device which is connected to the LAN bus (e.g. keypad etc).
Low Battery
The control panel has detected that an RF sensor has a low battery condition. Replace the RF sensor battery and transmit an RF signal to clear the low battery condition.
Default PIN Trble
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that either the Installer PIN or User 1 PIN is still set to the factory default PIN. Change the PIN to clear the fault.
Box Tamper
The control panel has detected that the tamper circuit on the LAN power supply module is faulted. Place a shunt across the tamper input pins or close the tamper circuit to clear the box tamper trouble condition.
Date & Time
This trouble message will display if the system date and time has not been set. Program the correct date and time to clear the fault.
Temperature Alert
The control panel has detected that the console (eg. keypad, LAN reader or fingerprint reader) has exceeded the global temperature high or temperature low settings.
Cabinet Tamper
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that it’s cabinet tamper input is faulted. Close the tamper switch to clear the fault.
Receiver Missing
This trouble message will display if the panel detects the
RF receiver is missing or disconnected. The trouble will clear when the receiver is reconnected.
Connection Trouble
The control panel has detected that an output device (eg. external siren etc) has failed or has been disconnected from the system.
11-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Overload Condition
The control panel has detected that an output has an over current condition.
Zone Was In Alarm
A zone was previously in alarm and requires alarm memory reset to clear. Turn the area on and then off again to clear alarm memory.
Telco Line Fail
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the telephone line has failed or been disconnected for a minimum of 30 seconds. The trouble will clear once the line has been restored for at least 1 minute.
LAN+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the current load on the LAN+ power terminal has exceeded it’s maximum rating of 1Amp DC. See MENU
7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
COMM+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the current load on the COMM+ terminal has exceeded it’s maximum rating of 3Amp DC. See MENU 7-3-2 —
Fuse Options.
ACC+ Overload
This trouble message will display if the panel detects that the current load on the +12V accessory power terminal has exceeded it’s maximum current rating of 1Amp D.C.
See MENU 7-3-2 — Fuse Options.
Service Required
This trouble message will display when the Service
Interval Timer expires. To clear the message the installer must enter and exit programming mode. See MENU 2-9-
2 — Service Interval.
Memory Checksum
This occurs if the memory checksum is corrupted. To try and correct this, enter programming mode and make a programming change like a user name then exit programming mode. If this problem still persists you must do a full system default.
Phone Line In Use
This trouble message will display while the panel is using the phone line. The message will clear when the line is released. This message can be prevented from displaying in MENU 5-2-2 — Phone Line Options.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
Battery Trouble
The control panel has detected that the real time clock module has a low or missing backup battery.
System > Commands >
History Log
-
-
MENU 7-0-2
This menu allows you to review the last 1000 recorded history events on your system. The information for each event may be displayed over a number of pages or screens depending on the actual event recorded.
When you enter this menu the system will show you the most recent event first. Once the log reaches the maximum event capacity each new event will replace the oldest event in the log in a first in , first out fashion.
To move from one log event to the next use the [] and [] keys or if you know the event number you are looking for simply enter the number followed by the [OK] key and the system will display that event.
A left [
] and right [
] arrow will may be displayed at the end of the first line on each log screen. These indicate that the history log contains more than one page for the current event. To view these pages use the [] and [] keys.
To review the History Log enter programming mode (PIN
+ MENU) then,
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [2].
2) The keypad will display the most recent event
stored in the history log.
E001 Mon,01Apr 02:00:00
Manual Test Report
Panel 1
E001 Dest= SLL-----
PSTN Ph-96561234
3) Use the [] and [] keys scroll between history
events and use the [] and [] keys to view the
pages within the event.
4) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
11-3
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
Some other examples of the log are as follows:
1)
E202 Sun,01Apr 03:41:45
Disarmed by User
Area 1 Name
Ur1 User 1 Name
2)
E202 Dest= SLL-----
Kp1 Keypad 1 Name
Panel 1
Dest 1 at 01-Apr 03:41:57
System > Commands >
Domestic Default
MENU 7-0-3
This command will configure the control panel for
Domestic format reporting (eg. mobile telephones etc). All alarm restore reports and open/close reporting options will be automatically disabled. Therefore, only emergency, burglary and fire reports will be sent.
The following table list the changes that will occur when you select domestic default using MENU 7-0-3.
Program Option
All Trouble Reports
All Bypass Reports
All Restore Reports
Domestic Default Value
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
E405 Sun,01Apr 06:41:45
Burglary Zone Bypassed
Area 1 Name
Zn3 Zone 3 Name
E405 Dest= SLL-----
Ur1 User 1 Name
Panel 1
Dest 1 at 01-Apr 06:41:57
Destination 1 TX Format
Access Route
Open / Close Reports
Test Route
System Route
Domestic Reporting
Log Only
Log Only
Log Only
Log Only
Table 33: Domestic Default Settings
The Dest= field displays the various reporting route information for up to eight different reporting destinations. Your installer will have configured these during installation.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [3]. The keypad will
display:
To RECONFIGURE all panel dialler programming to
The following letters will be displayed in the eight destination locations indicating the status of the report.
The log will also show the actual time a report was sent.
DOMESTIC, Press OK. or To
Cancel,Press MENU.
Dest =
S = Sent
L = Logged
P = Pending
F = Failed
A = Aborted
2) Press [OK] to start the default process or press
[MENU] to cancel and exit.
3) The keypad will display the following message
during the default process and will exit back to the menu when finished.
Defaulting System
..Please Wait..
System > Commands >
Factory Default
MENU 7-0-4
This command will erase ALL programmable data and return the control panel to factory default settings.
Defaulting the panel will NOT erase any history events that are currently stored in the panel.
i
Note
During a factory default both the Status and Dialler
LED indicators on the panel will flash very quickly to indicate defaulting is still in progress.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [4]. The keypad will
display:
11-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
This command will ERASE all panel programming. To
Continue press OK, or
MENU to cancel
2) Press [OK] to start the default process or press
[MENU] to cancel and exit.
3) The keypad will display the following message
during the default process and will exit back to the menu when finished.
Defaulting System
..Please Wait..
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
System > Commands >
Service Mode
MENU 7-0-8
This command allows the installer to put the panel into service mode before performing system maintenance or upgrades. When in service mode, the following functions are disabled. By default, service mode will automatically terminate after 2 hours if not terminated sooner by the installer.
Zone Tamper
Alarm Outputs
Dialler
Panel Tamper
System > Commands >
Template Default
MENU 7-0-5
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [8]. The keypad will
display the current service mode status.
This command is RESERVED.
Service Mode
Service Mode is OFF,
To turn ON, Press ON.
Press OK or MENU
System > Commands >
TimeZone Array
-
MENU 7-0-6
This menu allows the master user and installer to view the true/false status of all 16 timezones at the same time.
The timezone status will continuously be updated on the display so that real time status can be seen. The top two rows of the display show the timezone number, the third row displays the timezone status.
T = TimeZone is True
F = TimeZone is False
- = Disabled or Not Available
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [0] + [6] and use the up and
down arrows to select the timezone to view. The keypad will display the status of all 16 timezones.
2) To turn service mode on, press [ON], or press [OFF]
to turn service mode off.
3) Press [OK] or [MENU] to exit when finished. i
Note
Service mode will automatically exit after 2 hours if
set to do so in MENU 7-7-4 — Installer Options.
0000000001111111
1234567890123456
TTTTT---FFFF----
Press OK or MENU
In the example above,
T = TimeZones 01 to 05 are true
F = TimeZones 09 to 12 are false
- = TimeZones 06 to 08 and Doors 13 to 16 are
Disabled or Not Available
2) When finished press [OK] or [MENU] to exit.
11-5
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
S YS T E M C LO C K
System > Clock >
Set Date And Time
-
MENU 7-1-0
This menu allows you to program and or adjust the date and time stored in the control panel. The time is entered in 24Hr format.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current date and time.
Set Date And Time
01-Jan-2012 04:37
Press OK to SAVE
2) Use the left, right, up and down arrow keys to set
the day, month, year, hour and minute. Use left and right keys to scroll the cursor left and right to between the month, day, year, hour and minute.
3) When the time is set correctly press [OK] to save
and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
System > Clock >
Summertime Off
MENU 7-1-2
At 2:00am
-
Month
-
Week
-
Day
This menu allows you to program when day light savings end during the year. This will allow the panel to automatically adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In
Australia, daylight savings moves backwards one hour at
3:00 am on the last Sunday of March.
To program Summertime Off, you will need to program the month of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month
(1 to 5) and the day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight saving ends.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Summertime off.
Summertime Off
Month Week Day
--- --- ---
Press OK to SAVE
System > Clock >
Summertime On
At 2:00am
-
Month
-
Week
MENU 7-1-1
-
Day
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the
month, week and year. Use the left and right keys to move the cursor between the month, week and year.
3) When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
This menu allows you to program when day light savings start during the year. This will allow the panel to automatically adjust it’s built in clock accordingly. In
Australia, daylight savings moves forward one hour at
2:00 am on the first Sunday of October.
To program Summertime On, you will need to set the month of the year (Jan to Dec), the week of the month
(1 to 5) and the day of the week (Sun to Sat) that daylight savings starts.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
Australian Daylight Savings Times
From 2008, the ACT, NSW, South Australia, Victoria and
Tasmania will all start daylight savings on the first Sunday in October and end on the first Sunday in April. This will result in an extra month of daylight savings for the ACT and introduces common start and finish dates in these states.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Summertime on.
Summertime On
Month Week Day
--- --- ---
Press OK to SAVE
Daylight Saving Begins
Turn Clock Ahead 1 hr
Sunday 2 October 2011
Sunday 7 October 2012
Sunday 6 October 2013
Daylight Saving Ends
Turn Clock Back 1 hr
Sunday 1 April 2012
Sunday 7 April 2013
Sunday 6 April 2014
Table 34: Daylight Savings Dates - Australia
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the
month, week and year. Use the left and right keys to move the cursor between the month, week and year.
3) When finished press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
11-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
System > Clock >
Locale
00 - Disabled
01 - SYDNEY
02 - MELBOURNE
03 - BRISBANE
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
04 - ADELAIDE
05 - PERTH
06 - HOBART
This menu programs the Locale in Australia. It will update the time from a central server every month. Call
Charges will apply.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [1] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current locale time.
Locale
MENU 7-1-3
MENU 7-3-0
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
Display AC Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to flash the
Mains Power icon as soon as the AC power supply has failed. If the power remains missing continiously for 1 minute then a system trouble will be registered on the keypad. When the AC power supply returns to normal the
Mains Power icon will remain on steady. If this option is disabled then the system will not flash the Mains Power icon and no system trouble will occur.
Report AC Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to report an
AC Fail to the base station if the mains power has been missing for a period of 1 minute. A restore report will be sent once the mains power has been restored for one minute.
00 - Disabled
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
Sync Clock to AC
Setting this option allows the panel to syncronise its internal clock with the mains frequency (50hz). This option should be set unless the panel is being used in an area where the mains power is unreliable.
2) Use [] and [] keys to select the locale required,
then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
S YS T E M P O W E R O P T I O N S
System > Power >
AC Options
1 Display AC Fail
2 Report AC Fail
3 Sync Clock To AC
4 Random AC Report 2hr
5 AC Fail After 1hr
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Display Clock Trouble
Random AC Reporting 2hr
Setting this option allows the panel to randomly delay
(up to 2 hours) the AC Fail report. This option is used to prevent multiple panels from reporting AC fail at the same time.
AC Fail After 1 Hour
Setting this option will cause the panel to only send an
AC Fail report to the base station if the power has been missing continuously for one hour. The Mains Power icon will operate as normal.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the AC Mains
Power system options.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current AC Options.
Display AC fail
Report AC Fail
Sync Clock To AC
Press OK ON OFF MENU
Display Clock Trouble
Setting this option will cause the panel to show a
Date and Time System trouble if the power is removed from the system for any period of time such as when performing a system upgrade or service work. If this option is disabled then no system trouble will appear and you will need to remember to set the correct time when you re power the system.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
11-7
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
System > Power >
Battery Options
1 Display Battery Fail
2 Report Battery Fail
3 Battery Test On Arming
4 OK To Arm Low Battery
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 7-3-1
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Battery report to the base station when it measures the battery voltage has dropped below 11.5 volts. A
Low Battery Restore report will be sent when the panel detects that the battery voltage is above 12.5 volts.
If the panel fails to detect the battery, or if it measures the battery voltage below 10.2 volts, then a Battery Test
Failed report will be sent. A Battery Test restore will be sent when the battery is re-connected or replaced.
Battery Test On Arming
Setting this option will cause the panel to perform an additional dynamic battery test each time Area 1 is armed All On.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the standby
Battery system options. The system is constantly monitoring the battery condition with a dynamic battery test carried out every 4 hours.
OK To Arm Low Battery
Setting this option will allow the system to be armed even though the panel currently has a low battery condition.
i
Note
i
Note
In previous versions, powering up the control panel
using battery could only be done 3 times. After this, an AC connection was required to power up the system.
In version 2.19, this behaviour has been removed and the control panel can now be powered up on battery an unlimited number of times without AC.
In version 2.19, if the system is running on battery
only and the battery voltage falls below 8.5V DC, the control panel will execute a shutdown. The control panel will not restart on battery again unless the battery voltage is higher than 9.0V DC.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Battery Options.
Display Battery Fail
Report Battery Fail
Battery Test On Arming
Press OK ON OFF MENU
When this option is disabled, the panel will not arm if there is a low battery condition or if the battery is missing. The user will be notified of the system trouble on the keypad and they will need to have the fault rectified before the system or area can be armed.
System > Power >
Fuse Options
1 Display COMM+ O/Load
2 Report COMM+ O/Load
3 Display +12v O/Load
4 Report +12v O/Load
5 Display LAN O/Load
6 Report LAN O/Load
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
MENU 7-3-2
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu option allows you to configure the Fuse related system options.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the keypad to display a Trouble condition when the panel detects that the standby battery is disconnected or that its voltage is low.
The trouble condition will clear as soon as the panel has measured the battery voltage is 12.5 volts or greater.
Report Battery Fail
Setting this option will cause the panel to send a Low
11-8
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [3] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Fuse Options.
Display COMM+ O/Load
Report COMM+ O/Load
Display +12v O/Load
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Display COMM+ O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
trouble message when the current load on the COMM + terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 3 Amps.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming i
Note
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 36 and or
37 will be affected by this menu option.
Report COMM+ O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the COMM + terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 3 Amps.
System > Siren >
Speed
MENU 7-4-1
Display +12v O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system trouble message when the current load on the +12 V terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
This menu allows you to customise the speed of the siren tone when a non-fire alarm is triggered. By changing the tone and speed, it is possible to program a unique siren sound for each system when you are installing a number of them in close proximity to each other.
Report +12v O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the +12 V terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current siren speed.
Speed
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . F
----------------------
Press OK to SAVE
Display LAN O/Load
Setting this option allows the keypad to display a system trouble message when the current load on the LAN+ terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
Report LAN O/Load
Setting this option will cause the panel to send an
Overcurrent Trouble report to the base station when the current load on the LAN+ terminal exceeds its maximum rating of 1Amp.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to change the
siren speed.
3) To test the new siren speed press [ON] to sound the
siren and press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
4) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is
achieved then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
i
Note
Only outputs programmed as event type 36 and or
37 will be affected by this menu option.
H O R N S P E A K E R O P T I O N S
System > Siren >
Tone
MENU 7-4-0
i
Note
Changes in version 2.19 have improved the frequency
reange and volume of the the speaker bee alerts.
This menu allows you to customise the tone that is emitted from the horn speaker when a non-fire alarm is triggered. By changing the tone and speed, it is possible to program a unique siren sound for each system when you are installing a number of them in close proximity to each other.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current siren tone.
Tone
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
----------------------
Press OK to SAVE
System > Siren >
Volume
-
MENU 7-4-2
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1 5
This menu allows you to program the volume level of the radio key speeker beeps which are heard when the system is armed and disarmed using a radio keyfob.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current siren volume (default = 15).
Volume
15
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to change the the
siren tone.
3) To test the new siren tone press [ON] to sound the
siren and press [OFF] to turn the siren off.
4) Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the desired siren tone is
achieved then press [OK] to save and exit, or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new volume
level. Valid entries are 0 to 15 where 15 = the loudest volume and 0 = no speeker beeps.
11-9
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
Only outputs programmed as Event Type 36, horn
speaker with beeps will be effected by this menu option.
i
Note
Changes in version 2.19 have improved the frequency
reange and volume of the the speaker bee alerts.
System > Siren >
Siren Swinger
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 7-4-3
0
3
This menu allows you to program how many times a zone programmed for Lockout Siren can sound the siren during each arming cycle.
At default, zones programmed for Lockout Siren will be able to trigger the siren 3 times before being locked out.
The count will be reset when the system or area is next disarmed.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [4] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current Swinger Siren count.
Siren Swinger
T I M E ZO N E S
The control panel has 2 fixed timezones (Tz0 - Disabled and
Tz1 - 24 Hr TimeZone) and 15 programmable timezones.
A timezone is created by setting up a valid time period that becomes TRUE whenever the time is equal to or after the start time and before the end time for the selected day.
There are 2 default timezones created within the system that cannot be changed. These are Tz0 = Disabled - which is FALSE 24/7 and Tz1 = 24 Hour which is TRUE 24/7 (TZ1 being the opposite of Tz0). Tz2 to 16 are configurable to reflect any operation time and day as required to operate, restrict, or control when something happens. Please refer to the following table that illustrates the effect of assigning timezones.
Assigned To Tz0 (Disabled)
Door
Door Lock
Door Group
Egress
Auto Arming
Output
Resulting Effect
No access
Will never unlock
No access
Will never trigger
Will never arm (Same as Tz1)
Will never trigger
3
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the new swinger
siren count. Valid entries are 0 to 15 where 0 = unlimited.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Assigned To Tz1 (24 Hr)
Door
Door Lock
Door Group
Egress
Auto Arming
Output
Resulting Effect
Full 24 hr access
Unlocked 24 hrs
Full 24 hr access
Operates 24 hrs
Will never arm (Same as Tz0)
Always triggered
Table 35: Fixed Timezones (Tz0 & Tz1)
i
Note
In previous versions, events programmed to follow timezones may fail to operate if the automatic test report option has been enabled. In version 2.14, this has been corrected.
i
Note
In previous versions, a timezone event that
immediateley followed an arming event could be missed due to the time it takes to complete the arming cycle. This situation woud only occur if the two events occurred within seconds of each other.
In version 2.19, timezone event processing has been changed to better cater for this scenario.
11-10 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
System > TimeZones >
Name
T i m e Z o n e
-
N a m e
MENU 7-5-0
2
This menu allows you to program a descriptive text name for each timezone in the system. Each timezone name has up to 20 characters. The timezone name will be referred to in other timezone related programming functions.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the timezone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the timezone number directly and press [OK].
Tz2 TimeZone 2 Name
Tz3 TimeZone 3 Name
Tz4 TimeZone 4 Name
Press OK or MENU
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the time zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the time zone number directly and press [OK].
Tz2 TimeZone 2 Name
Tz3 TimeZone 3 Name
Tz4 TimeZone 4 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each timezone include 4 different start/stop periods that can be programmed.
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press OK or MENU
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the timezone name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
Name Tz3
3) Enter the start and stop times in 24 hour format.
Each include - Hours (HH), Minutes (MM) and
Seconds (SS).
Time Tz2 Period 1
Start Time Stop Time
00:00:00 23:59:59
Press OK to SAVE
TimeZone 3 Name
Press OK to SAVE i
Note
See Alpha Text Programming in Section 4 -
Programming Overview for further detail on entering alpha text.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
If the start time equals the stop time then the time
zone is disabled. A time of --:--:-- is not used.
System > TimeZones >
Time
-
MENU 7-5-1
System > TimeZones >
Day
Start Time Stop Time
-
MENU 7-5-2
Period 1
-: -: --
HH MM SS
-: -: --
HH MM SS
Period 1
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hol
N N N N N N N N
Start Time Stop Time
Period 2
-: -: --
HH MM SS
-: -: --
HH MM SS
Period 2
Period 3
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hol
N N N N N N N N
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hol
N N N N N N N N
Period 3
Start Time
-: -: --
HH MM SS
Stop Time
-: -: --
HH MM SS
Period 4
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hol
N N N N N N N
Period 4
Start Time
-: -: --
HH MM SS
Stop Time
-: -: --
HH MM SS
This menu allows you to program the start time and stop time of each timezone period. Each timezone can have up to 4 different periods.
This menu allows you to program which days of the week each period of the timezone will operate. To program, use keys [1] to [8] to toggle on or off the days that the time zone period will operate (e.g. to enable Monday press [2] and to disable Monday press [2] again).
11-11
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [2] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the time zone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the timezone number directly and press [OK].
Tz2 TimeZone 2 Name
Tz3 TimeZone 3 Name
Tz4 TimeZone 4 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each timezone include 4 seperate start/stop periods that can be programmed.
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press OK or MENU
2) Using the arrow keys , select the start/stop period
required, then press [OK] to select. Each timezone include 4 seperate start/stop periods that can be programmed. Each timezone period can have different days of the week programmed.
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Press OK or MENU
3) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable. Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required.
Invert Period Logic
Master Edit Allowed
Reserved
Press OK ON OFF MENU
3) Use keys [1] to [8] to enable/disable the days of the
week that the timezone period will operate.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Day Tz2 Period 1
S M T W T F S Hol
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Press 1-8 OK to SAVE
Invert Logic
Setting this option will invert both the start time and stop time of the period of the selected timezone. The programmed start time will now be the stop time and the programmed stop time will be the start time.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
System > TimeZones >
TimeZone Options
-
MENU 7-5-3
1 Invert Period Logic
2 Master Edit Allowed
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
This menu allows you to program what function the time zone will perform. There are a number of options which are explained in more detail below.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [5] + [3] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the timezone in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the timezone number directly and press [OK].
Tz1 24 Hour TimeZone
Tz2 TimeZone 2 Name
Tz3 TimeZone 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
Master Edit Allowed
Setting this option allows a master user to edit the timezone period. There are many instances where altering a timezone can seriously alter the behaviour of the system and only trained professional operators should be allowed to perform this type of operation.
S YS T E M H O L I DAYS
The control panel has provision for up to 8 individual holiday time periods which can be used to allow or deny access to users or to operate outputs via timezones.
Holidays are defined by setting a start and stop date so it is possible to create 1 system holiday that spans multiple days. For example the holiday could start on the 1st Jan and end on the 5th Jan.
System > Holidays >
Holiday Name
H o l i d a y
-
MENU 7-6-0
1 N a m e
This menu allows you to program a 20 character text name for each holiday.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [0] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Holiday in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
Holiday number directly and press [OK].
11-12 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
H1 Holiday 1 Name
H2 Holiday 2 Name
H3 Holiday 3 Name
Press OK or MENU
2) User the arrow and number keys to move and
change text. When the Holiday Name is complete, press [OK]. At any time you can press the [OFF] key to clear the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
Holiday Name H1
Holiday 1 Name
Press OK to SAVE
System > Holidays >
Start Stop Dates
-
MENU 7-6-1
Start 12am
01 Jan
DD MM
Stop 12am
01 Jan
DD MM
This menu allows you to program the start and stop date for each holiday period. Holidays can be as short as one day or as long as 364 days.
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [6] + [1] and use the up and
down arrows to highlight the Holiday in the list then press [OK]. Alternatively, you can enter the
Holiday number directly and press [OK].
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
holiday that you want to change, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the holiday number, then press [OK]. The keypad will display the holiday start date:
Holiday Dates H1
Start 12am Stop 12am
01 Jan 01 Jan
Press OK to SAVE
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
S YS T E M O P T I O N S
System > System Options >
General Options
1 Display LAN Fail
2 Report LAN Fail
3 Alarm On LAN Fail
4 Cannot Change Own PIN
5 Reserved
6 Monitor Default PINs
7 PIN Always Required
8 Display Menu Numbers
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 7-7-0
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
This menu allows you to configure the General system options. All options are global to users, areas and keypads.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [0]. The keypad will
display the current General system options.
Display LAN Fail
Report LAN Fail
Alarm On LAN Fail
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable. Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as required.
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
Display LAN Fail
Setting this option allows all connected keypads to display a system trouble when a device connected the the system LAN has failed to communicate to the panel.
Report LAN Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to report which LAN device has failed to the base station.
3) To program, use the left and right arrows to scroll
the cursor left and right between the holiday day and month options and use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the day and month.
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
i
Note
If the start day and month equals the stop day
and month then no holiday exists. There must be a difference between start and stop dates.
Alarm On LAN Fail
Setting this option allows the panel to sound an alarm when a device connected to the LAN failed to communicate to the panel.
Cannot Change Own PIN
Setting this option prevents all users the ability to change their own PIN.
Monitor Default PINs
Setting this option will cause the panel to monitor the default Installer PIN and User 1 PIN which are factory set to 1234 and 2580 respectively. If either of these codes are left as default then the keypad will display the system trouble Default PIN. The fault will clear once the code or codes have been changed.
11-13
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
PIN Always Required
Setting this option will force the system to request a valid PIN to be entered before any menu functions can be accessed. If this option is not set then some restricted menu options will be available without entering a valid
PIN.
Display Menu Numbers
Setting this option causes the keypad to display the menu numbers for all commands and menu programming options. The menu numbers can be used as navigation shortcuts when programming.
System > System Options >
Area Options
1 Area 1 Common
2 First Open Last Close
3 Reset Siren All Users
4 Power Up As Down
5 Fault ACK All Areas
6 Delay Trouble Beeps
7 Power Up Disarmed
8 Ignore Trouble On Arm
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 7-7-1
This menu allows you to configure the Area system options. All options are global to users, areas and keypads.
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [1]. The keypad will
display the current Area system options.
Area 1 Common
First Open Last Close
Reset Siren All Users
Press OK ON OFF MENU
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Area 1 Common
Setting this option will cause the system to automatically arm Area 1 All On when all other areas have been turned on. As soon as any area is turned off the system will automatically turn Area 1 off. Only one common area is available on the system. If no common area is required then do not set this option.
11-14
First Open Last Close
Setting this option will cause the system to only report an opening signal to the base station when the first area is Disarmed and a closing signal when the last area has been armed or turned All On.
Reset Siren All Users
Setting this option allows a user with a valid PIN to silence alarm outputs from any keypad on the system without the need to toggle the keypad to the area that the alarm occurred.
If this option has not been programmed, the user will need to toggle the keypad to the area the alarm occurred in and then silence the alarm by entering their PIN followed by the [OFF] key.
Power Up As Down
Setting this option will cause the panel to power up in the same state as it was when it was powerd down.
For example with this option set if the panel is in the disarmed state and all power is removed for service work to be done. When the power is reapplied, the panel will start in the disarmed state. Any zone that was programmed as bypassed when the power was removed will remain bypassed when the power supply has restored.
If this option is not programmed, the system will always power up in the armed All On state and any zones bypassed prior to power loss will power up as unbypassed zones.
Fault ACK All Areas
Setting this option allow system trouble faults to be acknowledged from any area or keypad on the system without the need to toggle over to the area the fault occurred in.
Delay Trouble Beeps
Setting this option will prevent any system trouble events from sounding the keypad speaker between the hours of 10pm until 7am. During this time, any new trouble events will be shown in the keypad display.
If any trouble events are still in effect at 7am, the keypad will begin sounding the trouble alert to notify the user of the problem. The function is primarily for use in residential installations.
Power Up Disarmed
Setting this option will allow the control panel to always power up in the disarmed state after removing both the battery and AC mains supply and then reapplying power.
Ignore Trouble On Arm
This option allows the control panel to ignore unsealed zones and trouble conditions when a user arms an area.
Low battery conditions cannot be ignored and will require the users input.
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
If this option is not set, when a user attempts to arm an area with zones unsealed or existing trouble condition, they will be required to press [OK] for each unsealed zone or trouble condition before the area would arm.
System > System Options >
Keypad Idle Screen
MENU 7-7-2
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
00 - No Idle Screen
01 - Date And Time
02 - Time
03 - Custom Screen
0 0
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to program the
High and Low temperatures. Use the left and right arrow keys to move between the High and Low temperatures.
Valid range =( 000
˚C to 050˚C).
3) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
This menu allows you to select a keypad Idle Screen which will appear on the display when there has been no activity at the keypad for a period of 2 minutes. The keypad display will return to normal as soon as any key has been pressed.
All keypads on the system will display the same screen saver. See the examples below.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [2]. The keypad will
display the current Keypad Idle Screen option.
Keypad Idle Screen
00 - No Idle Screen
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
System > System Options >
Installer Options
1 Report Installer
2 Report Prog Change
3 Restrict Installer PIN
4 Reserved
5 Auto Exit Install 2hr
6 Auto Exit Service 2hr
7 Multi Tenant Mode
8 Allow Defaulting
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
MENU 7-7-4
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
This menu allows you to configure the Installer system options.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [4]. The keypad will
display the current Installer options.
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to select which
idle screen you want to display then press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
Report Installer
Report Prog Change
Restrict Installer PIN
Press OK ON OFF MENU
System > System Options >
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
0 0 0 ˚C
Hi TEMP
-
MENU 7-7-3
0 0 0 ˚C
Lo TEMP
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
This menu allows you to set the keypad High and Low temperature values which the system will monitor. Valid temperatures are from 00 ˚C minimum to a maximum of
50 ˚C with a tolerance = +/- 1 ˚C.
If the temperature on the selected keypad falls below the minimum set temperature then the keypad will display
‘Low Temp xx
˚C If the temperature increases above the maximum set temperature then the keypad will display
High temp xx
˚C.
Where xx = the set temperature to be monitored.
(*** System Wide Parameter ***)
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [3]. The keypad will
display the current temperature settings.
Keypad Hi/Lo Temp
High Temp Low Temp
000 000
Press OK to SAVE
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
2) Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the
option then press the [ON] key to enable or the
[OFF] key to disable.
3) Repeat Step 2 until all options are programmed as
required, then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
Report Installer
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log entry and to send a report to the base station when the installer enters and exits Installer programming mode.
The entry/exit reports will follow the System Route.
Report Prog Change
Setting this option will cause the panel to make a log entry and to send a report to the base station when the installer has changed programming data. The data changed reports will follow the System Route.
Restrict Installer PIN
After power up, the installer PIN can turn on or off an area (or multiple areas if partitioned) until a user PIN is used to turn an area on or off. If the system is in service mode, then the installer PIN can always silence and turn off an area when an alarm even occurs.
11-15
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
Auto Exit Install 2hr
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically terminate Installer programming mode after 2 minutes of no activity on the keypad. If this option is not set, the panel will remain in Installer programming mode until manually terminated.
Auto Exit Service 2hr
Setting this option will cause the panel to automatically terminate service mode after 2 hours of no activity on the keypad keys. If this option is not set, the panel will remain in the service mode until it is manually terminated.
Multi Tenant Mode
This options includes additional support for muti tenant applications such as self storage garages or school storage lockers etc.
When enabled, the option will lock the first 144 users on the system to each of the 144 zones on the system. Each time the users enters their PIN + [OFF], the corresponding zone is automatically bypassed allowing them to access the zone area. The zone is again ready to detect intrusion when the user enters their PIN + [ON].
Users 145 to 255 continue to operate as normal users.
System > System Options >
Language
0 - English
1 - Alternate Language
This menu allows you to select the language that will be displayed on the keypad. You have a choice between
English (default) or a second language (determined by the country that the control panel is shipped to).
1) Enter [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [5]. The keypad will
display the following:
Language
0
Press 0-9 OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the language option
as required then press [OK] to save and exit or press
[MENU] to exit without saving.
System > System Options >
Site Name
1 Characters
M y A l a r m
MENU 7-7-5
-
MENU 7-7-7
0
32
Allow Defaulting
Setting this option will allow the panel to be defaulted back to the factory setting using the the on board push button switch. See below for defaulting instructions.
If this option is not set then manual defaulting will not function and the only way to default the panel will be by using the current installer PIN. If the installer PIN is not know then the panel will need to be returned to Bosch
Security for defaulting. A charge applies for this service.
This menu allows the master user to program the emails subject line to identify the alarm system (eg. site name) to the receiving party. A maximum of 32 characters of text can be entered in this field. Use the [] and [] keys to scroll the cursor left and right to view the entire name.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [7] + [7].
The keypad will display the current Site Name. i
Note
Defaulting the panel does not erase all events in the
history event log. If this option has been disabled, the dialler seize relay will pulse or click 4 times during power up.
Site Name
MyAlarm
Press
OK to SAVE
2) Using the numeric keys, enter the description of the
control panels site name. You can change a single
chanracter by scrolling the cursor left [] and right
[].
At any time you can use the [] and [] keys to scroll through the complete list of available characters.
To clear all text from the cursor position to the right, press the [OFF] key.
3) When the site name is complete, press [OK] to save
and exit, or press [MENU] to exit without saving.
11-16 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
S YS T E M T E S T I N G
System > System Testing >
Walk Test All Zones
-
-
MENU 7-9-0
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
Battery Test Passed
Press OK To Continue
To Go Back Press OK
This menu allows you to test all zones within an area at the same time.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [0]. The keypad will
display a list of areas that are available to walk test zones.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, select the area
that you want to walk test, then press [OK].
Alternatively, you can enter the area number, then press [OK]. The keypad will begin to scroll all zones that need to be tested.
To test Zn1 open then close
Zone 1 Name
Press OK or MENU
If the battery has failed the test, the keypad will display:
Battery Test Failed
Please Call For Service
To Go Back Press OK
2) Press [OK] to exit.
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
3) Open and close each zone that needs to be tested.
A zone that has been successfully tested will no longer scroll on the keypad display. When all zones have been tested, the keypad will display.
All zones have been successfully tested
Press OK or MENU
4) Press [OK] to save and exit or press [MENU] to exit
without saving.
System > System Testing >
Battery Test
-
-
MENU 7-9-1
This menu allows you to test the panels standby battery.
The battery test will last about two minutes and the keypad will display the voltage of the battery during the test.
i
Note
In previous versions, when a user manually tests the backup battery, the control panel may pass or fail the backup battery without actually testing the battery.
In version 2.16, this has been corrected.
1) Press [MENU] + [7] + [9] + [1]. The keypad will
display the battery voltage whilst under test:
Battery test in progress.
Please wait..
Voltage = 13.4V
To Go Back Press OK
If the battery has passed the test, the keypad will display:
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
11-17
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
System Programming
This page left intentionally blank
11-18 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 12
Programming Examples
T his section includes a number of programming examples detailling how to implement some common installation functionality.
Examples are provided to show;
Opening a Garage Door using a Single Digit Code.
Opening a Garage Door using a 4 Button Keyfob.
Auto Arming an Area using a Timezone.
Operating an Output using a Timezone.
Using a Reader to Unlock a Door.
Using a Reader to Unlock a Door and Disarm Area 1.
Using a Reader to Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm.
Using Call Line Identification for RAS.
Sending SMS Reports Via The PSTN.
Auto lock and unlock a Door using a Timezone.
Opening a Garage Door Using a 4 Button RF Keyfob
The following example show how to configure the control panel to allow control of a grage door as well as arm and disarm functions using a 4 Button Keyfob. The example assumes User 10 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Set RF Receiver Type in MENU 3-5-0 = 04 - Bosch
Serial Rcvr
2) Assign Keyfob to User 10 in MENU 1-3-0
3) Set Output 5 - Event Type in MENU 4-1-1 = 54
(54 = RF Keyfob Function 2)
4) Set Output 5 - Event Assignment in MENU 4-1-2 =
01 (01 =Security System)
5) Set Output 5 - Output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 = 4
(04 = Open 1 Shot Low)
6) Set Output 5 - Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 = 000
000 005 000 (5 seconds)
7) Enable Output 5 - Output Options in MENU 4-1-5 =
Display Status Message.
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code
The control panel can be used to operate an electrically controlled door using a single digit code. The example assumes User 10 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Set user PIN Length in MENU 1-5-0 = 00
(00 = Variable)
2) Set user 10 PIN in MENU 1-1-2 = 5
3) Set user 10 Area Assignment in MENU 1-4-1 = 0
4) Set Output 5 - Event Type in MENU 4-1-1 = 56
(56 = Follow Pin)
5) Set Output 5 - Event Assignment in MENU 4-1-2 =
10 (10 =User Number)
6) Set Output 5 - Output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 = 04
(04 = Open 1 Shot Low)
7) Set Output 5 - Time Parameter MENU 4-1-4 = 000
000 005 000 (5 seconds)
8) Enable Output 5 - Output Options MENU 4-1-5 =
Display Status Message
Wire Output 5 to the appropriate Door Strike. Each time button [5] + [OK] is pressed on the keypad the door will activate.
Operating an Output using a TimeZone
To automatically operate an output using a timezone, select a timezone that is not being used, and program the timezone name in MENU 7-5-0 to something convenient.
Procedure
1) Set the timezone period start time in MENU 7-5-1
to the time you want the output to operate and set the stop time to the time you want the output to turn off.
2) Set the timezone period days in MENU 7-5-2 for the
days of the week that you want the output to operate on.
3) Set the Event Type as 58 - TimeZone for the output
that you want the timezone to operate in MENU
4-1-1.
4) Set the output Event Assignment to follow the
timezone you want the output to follow in MENU
4-1-2.
5) Program the Output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 as 00 -
Open To Low or 07 - Low To Open as required.
12-1
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Examples
Auto Arming an Area using a Timezone
The control panel can be configured to automatically arm and or disarm an area automatically if required using a
Timezone.
Procedure
1) To setup an Auto Arming time, select a timezone
that is not being used, and program the timezone name in MENU 7-5-0 to something convenient.
2) Set the timezone period stop time in MENU 7-5-1
for the arming time you require. The START time should be set to --:--am (by pressing the [OFF] key), which prevents the system from auto disarming.
3) Set the timezone period day in MENU 7-5-2 for the
days of the week you require the area to automatically arm.
4) Set the timezone that you want the area to follow
in MENU 2-1-8.
5) Set the global Auto Arm Pre Alert time (default = 10
minutes) in MENU 2-8-4.
i
Note
The auto arm pre alert time will commence when the timezone stop time occurs. When the auto arm pre alert time has finished, the area(s) will automatically turn on.
Unlocking a Door and Disarming Area 1 using a LAN
Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 1 (Area 1) in
MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 1, 2 & 4 in
MENU 6-1-2.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
Unlock a Door using a LAN Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 0 (All Areas)
in MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 1, 2, 3 & 4 in MENU 6-1-2.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
Unlock a Door and Arm/Disarm Area 1 using a LAN
Reader
This example assumes LAN Reader 9, Door Assignment 4 ,
User 1 and Output 5 are being used.
Procedure
1) Assign LAN Reader 9 to Door Assignment 4 in
MENU 6-1-7.
2) Set output 5 to Event type to 60 - Door in MENU
4-1-1 and the output Door Assignment to 4 in
MENU 4-1-2. Set the output Polarity in MENU 4-1-3 and the output Time Parameter in MENU 4-1-4 as required.
3) Assign the user to Door 4 in MENU 1-4-5. Users can
belong to multiple doors.
4) Assign the LAN Reader Home Area to 1 (Area 1) in
MENU 6-1-3 and then disable Options 2 & 4 in
MENU 6-1-2.
5) Program the Door Assignment for User 1 in MENU
1-4-5 as 4.
6) Add a token to User 4 in MENU 1-2-0.
7) Exit programming mode and present the token to
the LAN reader to access the door.
Using CLI to establish Upload/Download Connection
Calling Number Identification is a feature provided by your teleco line provider that can help you identify who is calling by displaying the caller’s phone number.
This feature is used by the control panel to identify the telephone number that the upload download computer is calling from. When the control panel verifies that the
12-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
calling number corresponds to any one of the three different numbers programmed in MENU 5-3-7 — CLI
Number then the panel will answer the call immediately.
This feature is extremely helpful for remote access using the Solution Link software to eliminate the need for making multiple calls to fax bypass or annoying customer calls where you have to let the number ring numerous times to trigger the panel into answering your call.
The numbers you store into MENU 5-3-7 should include the full STD number of the calling line you which the panel to answer on.
Almost every telephone line will send its CLI information when making a call however you will not receive the callers line information if you don’t specifically request and enable this feature with your telco line provider.
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Examples
Door Auto Lock/Unlock By TimeZone
The control panel is capable of automatically unlocking and locking single door or multiple doors using a single timezone.
Programming the TimeZone Auto Unlock/Lock Times
1) Select a timezone that is not used and program the
timezone name (description) in MENU 7-5-0.
2) Set the timezone start time (Door Auto Unlock
Time) and stop time (Door Auto Lock Time) in
MENU 7-5-1.
3) Set the days of the week that the timezone will
operate (including holidays if required) in MENU
7-5-2.
Programming Output For Door Operation
Sending SMS Alarm Reports Via The PSTN
The control panel is capable of reporting alarm information directly to a mobile phone using SMS messaging without the need to add any additional hardware.
Procedure
1) Determine the required reporting destination and
set the reporting format to SMS.
2) When setting the control panel to report via SMS in
destination 1 and/or destination 2, the control panel has been predefined to use the MyAlarm
Gateway telephone numbers in MENU 5-5-7 (SMS
Primary = 13450641 / SMS secondary = 1341825).
3) Program the mobile phone number that the
messages are to be sent to into MENU 5-1-1
(Destination 1) and/or MENU 5-1-2 (Destination 2).
You can send an SMS message to 5 different mobile telephone numbers per destination for each reporting event.
4) Program the destination route for each event type
which is required to report to SMS. By default all event types report to Destination 1.
4) Select an output that is not used and program the
output name in MENU 4-1-0.
5) In MENU 4-1-1, set the output event type as 60 -
Door.
6) In MENU 4-1-2, set the output event assignment to
the door number that you wish to control (eg. 01 -
Door 1 Name).
7) In MENU 4-1-3, set the output polarity for the door
operation (eg. 04 - Open, One Shot Low).
8) In MENU 4-1-4, set the time that you want the door
to unlock when a user presents their credentials
(eg. 000 000 005 000 = 5 seconds).
Setting the Door Options
9) Select the door that will follow the timezone and
program the door name (description) in MENU 4-2-
0.
10) Set the timezone that the door that will follow for
auto lock/unlock in MENU 4-2-2. Multiple doors can be programmed to follow the same timezone if required.
11) Set the door options as required in MENU 4-2-3
(default = Hold Off Unlock If Area Armed).
i
Note
The system can be configured to report via SMS using an optional GSM module if one is fitted. The procedure for implemeting SMS via GSM is different to the procedure shown above. Please consult the
GSM module instructions for more information.
Setting Console Door Assignment
12) Program the console (keypad/reader) door
assignment in MENU 6-1-7.
13) Program other console (keypad/reader) options as
required including Home Area, Area Options and
General Options.
Setting User Door Assignment
14) In MENU 1-4-5. assign each user to the door being
used as required. Each user can be assigned to multiple doors.
15) Program the users PIN, token, fingerprint as
required.
12-3
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Programming Examples
» » E N D O F S E C T I O N « «
12-4 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 13
Specifications
Specifications
Electrical
Voltage Input
• 16 - 22 VAC
Current Requirement
• 22 VA min plug pack adapter or transformer
Panel Current Consumption
• 110 ma standby
Power Outputs
Continuous Power
• 1 Amp (Primary supply source only)
Secondary Source
• 5 Amp (Total with both primary and secondary source combined)
Stand-By Battery
• 12 VDC, 7AH sealed rechargeable battery
Min Operating Voltage
• 10.2 VDC
LAN BUS
• Max total LAN length using multi strand security cable
= 300m.
• Max total LAN length using 2 pair twisted shielded data cable (Belden 8723) = 1200m.
Telephone Connection
RJ-12 Socket or 4-way terminal.
Temperature
0 o
to 55 o
C.
Relative Humidity
5 to 85% at 30 o
C non-condensing.
Enclosure Dimensions
MW720 - 385mm (W), 260mm (H), 90mm (D)
MW730 - 385mm (W), 520mm (H), 90mm (D)
PCB Dimensions
235mm (W), 40mm (H), 85mm (D)
Warranty
3 years from date of manufacture
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Approvals
♦
EN 55022:2006
♦
EN50131-3:2009 (Grade 2 - Class II)
♦
AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006
♦
EN 60950-1:2001 Amdt 11:2004
♦
AS/NZS 60950.1:2003 Amdt 1:2006
♦
AS/ACIF S002:2005
♦
PTC200 May 2006
♦
ETSI TS 103 021-1, 2 & 3
Compatible Keypads
♦
CP050B - Night Arm Station
♦
CP150B - External Vandal Resistant Keypad
♦
CP151B - External Vandal Resistant Keypad
♦
CP700B - Graphic (White)
♦
CP701B - Graphic + Prox (White)
♦
CP710B - Graphic (Black)
♦
CP711B - Graphic + Prox (Black)
♦
CP740B - Graphic Keypad With Wi-Fi (White)
♦
CP743B - Graphic Keypad With Wi-Fi (Black)
♦
CP722B - Graphic Keypad Smart Card Reader (White)
♦
CP732B - Graphic Keypad Smart Card Reader (Black)
♦
PR115B - External Smart Card Reader (Black)
♦
PR116B - External Smart Card Reader (White)
♦
PR113B - Internal Smart Card Reader (Black)
♦
PR114B - Internal Smart Card Reader (White)
♦
PR109B - Internal LAN Prox Reader (Black)
♦
PR110B - Internal LAN Prox Reader (White)
♦
PR111B - External LAN Prox Reader (Black)
♦
PR112B - External LAN Prox Reader (White)
Expansion Devices
♦
CM101B - Voice Module
♦
CM195B - Multi RF Receiver Interface
♦
CM401B - LAN Translator (BPT Intercom)
♦
CM704B - 8/16 Zone Input Expander
♦
CM705B - Universal Expansion Module
♦
CM707B - 8/16 Piggy Back Zone Input Expander Module
♦
CM710B - 4-Way Relay Output Module
♦
CM720B - 1 Amp Power Supply Module
♦
CM728B - Biometric Fingerprint Reader (Black)
13-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Specifications
♦
CM729B - Biometric Fingerprint Reader (White)
♦
CM743B - GSM/GPRS 2G Plug On Module
♦
CM744B - GSM/GPRS 3G Plug On Module
♦
CM751B - TCP/IP Interface Module
♦
CM760B - Real Time Clock Module
♦
CM797B - LAN Isolator Module
♦
CM796B - Wiegand to RS485 LAN Interface Module
♦
CM723B - LAN 5 Amp P/S Module/Dual Battery Chargers
Accessories
♦
SW500B - Solution Link Software
♦
SW501B - Site Manager Onsite Administration Software
♦
CM900 - Direct Link Cable
♦
CM901 - Flash Upgrade Cable
♦
CM910 - Combined Direct Link/Flash Programmer - USB
♦
CM255 - Default Key
♦
CP799 - Installer Service Keypad
The following parts are supplied with the panel
(Australian models only - content may differ in export models )
Panel Assembly Includes 1 x Metal Enclosure with tamper
1 x Panel PWA
1 x User Manual
Resistor Pack Includes 1 x Red Battery Lead
1 x Black Battery Lead
1 x 2-Way Shunt With Handle
2 x Phillips Pan Head Zinc Plate Screw
1 x Telephone Cable RJ12 6P/4C
10 x 3K3 – 0.25W +/- 1% Metal Film Resistors
10 x 6K8 – 0.25W +/- 1% Metal Film Resistors
1 x 3-Way AC Terminal Block
1 x Panel Tamper Switch
1 x Tamper Switch Bracket
1 x Installer Reference Guide
1 x Resistor Pack
13-2 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Specifications
This page left intentionally blank
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
13-3
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Specifications
Solution 6000
Product Matrix
Showing Products Scheduled For Release In 2015 - Firmware Release V2.23
Any one of the IP modules shown on the right can be installed.
IP via Wi-Fi is available when the Wi-Fi keypad is used.
Solution Link
World Class Integrated Intrusion and Access Control system
Remote • Access • Software for Solution Control Panels
P/N - CM744B
Plug On 3G GSM/
GPRS Module
F.01U.271.876
P/N - SW500B
Upload/Download
Software (V2.11 or higher)
F.01U.271.750
or
P/N - CM743B
Plug On 2G GSM/
GPRS Module
F.01U.271.875
or
P/N - CM366B
IP Communications Module
3G GSM/GPRS/SMS/Ethernet
P/N - CM751B
Plug On Ethernet
IP Module
P/N - CM101B
Interactive Voice
Control Module or
F.01U.287.311
F.01U.271.877
x1
Panel supports direct
RX connection or via
CM195.
P/N - CC610PB
Solution 6000 Security
Controller PCB
F.01U.294.849
F.01U.271.505
x1 x1
P/N - CM195
Multi RF Receiver
Interface
F.01U.271.513
P/N - SW501B
Site Manager
Onsite Administration Software
(IP Ethernet Connectivity Required)
F.01U.294.862
1 x RF3212E Receiver-
Directly Connected
4.998.800.010
P/N - CM710B
4 Way LAN Relay
Output Expander
Module
P/N - CM720B
1AMP LAN Power
Supply & Battery
Charger Module
F.01U.271.516
x8
P/N - CP050B
Night Arming
Station
F.01U.271.517
x8
P/N - CP151B
Slim Style
External Keypad
Graphic Keypad
P/N - CP700B White
F.01U.275.889
P/N - CP710B Black
F.01U.275.891
Up to 16 keypad devices of any type can be installed on the Solution 6000 panel.
This includes Keypads, Readers and
Wiegand to LAN Interfaces.
RF3212E RF3212E RF3212E
WiFi
13-4
F.01U.271.536
F.01U.271.870
SMART CARD CREDENTIALS AND LAN READERS
P/N - PR365
Adhesive Smart Card Sticker
F.01U.294.869
P/N - PR301
Smart Card Token with Keyring
F.01U.294 867
P/N - PR370
Dual Smart Card and
EM Format Token
F.01U.316 496
Fingerprint Reader
P/N - CM729B White
F.01U.275.882
P/N - CM728B Black
F.01U.275.883
P/N - CP150B
External Keypad
F.01U.271.869
Graphic Keypad With WiFi
P/N - CP740B White
F.01U.294.858
P/N - CP743B Black
F.01U.294.860
P/N - PR250
ISO Prox Card
F.01U.271.875
PROX CREDENTIALS AND LAN READERS
P/N - PR260
Clam Shell Prox Card
F.01U.271.693
P/N - PR200
Prox Token
F.01U.271.690
DF-77SGW
DF-77SGW
P/N - PR201
Prox Token with
Keyring
F.01U.271.691
P/N - PR350
ISO Smart Card
F.01U.294.868
Graphic Keypad with
Internal Smart Card Reader
P/N - CP722B White
F.01U.294.854
P/N - CP732B Black
F.01U.294.856
External
Smart Card Reader
P/N - PR116B White
F.01U.294.866
P/N - PR115B Black
F.01U.294.865
Internal
Smart Card Reader
P/N - PR114B White
F.01U.294.864
P/N - PR113B Black
F.01U.294.863
Graphic Keypad with
Built-In Prox Reader
P/N - CP701B White
F.01U.275.890
P/N - CP711B Black
F.01U.275.892
External Prox Reader
P/N - PR112B White
F.01U.271.874
P/N - PR111B Black
F.01U.271.873
Internal Prox Reader
P/N - PR110B White
F.01U.271.872
P/N - PR109B Black
F.01U.271.871
Copyright © 2015 — In the interest of ongoing product improvement we reserve the right to change specif ications at any time without notice — E&OE — Solution 6000 Product Matrix 9/2015
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Specifications
Solution 6000
Product Matrix
Showing Products Scheduled For Release In 2015 - Firmware Release V2.23
P/N - CP799B
Service Keypad
Installer Tool
F.01U.276.909
x8
P/N - CM797B
LAN Isolator Module
F.01U.275.885
Up to 8 LAN Isolator modules can be connected
Isolators provide electrical isolation between LAN segments reducing the chance of surge damage.
Isolators can also be used to increase the total LAN length beyond 1200m.
P/N - CM704B
8/16 LAN Zone Expander
F.01U.271.515
x8
P/N - CM910B
Combined Direct Link \Flash
Programmer Interface - USB
F.01U.316.497
Up to 8 zone expanders of any type can be connected to the system. When using Single or Alarm & Tamper EOL, the CM707B can be installed to provide 16 zones on the CM705B
Expander. The CM707B cannot be installed when using split EOL monitoring.
Max panel zone count conf iguration is:
Single EOL = 136
Alarm & Tamper =136
Split EOL = 144 x8
= Encrypted RS485 LAN
= ISOLATED Encrypted RS485 LAN
= Programmable Serial Input x1
P/N - CM760B
Real Time Clock Module
F.01U.275.884
P/N - CM705PB
8/16 Universal LAN Zone
Expander PWA Only
F.01U.275.880
x15
P/N - CM796B
Wiegand to DF RS485
LAN Interface Module
F.01U.287.314
P/N - CM707B
8 Zone Piggy
Back Expander
F.01U.275.888
P/N - CM435B
Power Terminal Expander Module
F.01U.275.898
P/N - CM444B
Slim Style Relay Card Form C - 2 Amp
F.01U.276.914
P/N - CM940B
6 Way Programmable Relay Card
Can be separated into single relay cards.
F.01U.275.899
P/N - CM255B
Panel Default Unlock Key
Will reset Installer PIN and RAS
PIN on Solution 6000 panels.
F.01U.271.514
SMART DEVICE APPS
Wiegand to LAN Interface can support 3rd party readers up to 40 bits.
SMS Control SMS Reports iFob Control
Smart device apps are available to enhance
SMS alarm reporting and to provide real time control of system areas, outputs and doors etc. More information can be found in the app stores.
The CM723B can be easily installed inside the CM350,
MW720B and MW730B enclosures.
P/N - CM436B - F.01U.271.892
Desktop Reader Interface For
Wiegand Readers.
No Reader supplied.
P/N - CM437B - F.01U.306.230
Desktop Reader Interface With Prox and MiFare Readers.
DF Format Readers Supplied.
CM436B and CM437B are for use with Solutionlink and Site Manager
Software packages and allow user credentials to be learnt at the PC.
W
A
Y E A R
3
R R A N
T
Y
P/N - CM723B
LAN 5 Amp P/S Module
With Dual Battery Chargers
F.01U.275.894
Panels, modules and keypads with Orange product labels or serial number labels are running Digif lex’s proprietary RS485
LAN system. They are not compatible with older modules carrying white product labels with the exception of the CM195 which is not a LAN module.
Made In
Australia
Some features may require panel and or module f irmware updates.
Copyright © 2015 — In the interest of ongoing product improvement we reserve the right to change specif ications at any time without notice — E&OE — Solution 6000 Product Matrix 9/2015
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
13-5
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Specifications
This page left intentionally blank
13-6 Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
SEC TION 14
Index
A
ACCESS
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Account #
Destination 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Destination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
AC Options
Delay Fail To 1 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Display Clock Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Display Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Random Delay Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Report Fail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Sync System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Alarm On LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Alarm, PIN Retry Exceed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Alpha Text Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Answering Machine Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Area Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
AREAS
Area Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Area Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Area Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Auto Arming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Chime Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Chime On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Disarming An Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Exit Time Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 10-10
Move To Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Output Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Part Mode 1 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Part Mode 2 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Senior Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Strobe Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Turn All Areas Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn All Areas On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Turn Area On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Arming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Auto Arm Pre-Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Auto Exit Installer Menu In 2 Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Auto Exit Service Mode In 2 Hrs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Automatic Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
B
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Basic Operations
Automatic Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Duress Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Remote Arming - Quick Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Turning An Area All On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Turning An Area Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Turning An Area Part On/Part 2 On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
BASIC REPORTING REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Battery Options
Display Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Execute Test On Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
OK To Arm Low Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Report Fail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Battery Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Burg Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Bypass Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
C
Call / Answer RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Call Attempt Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Call Back Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Call Back Verification Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Call Forward Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Call Forward On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cancel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cannot Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
CHIME
Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Turn On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
CLI Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Clock Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 11-6
Command Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Common Area
Area 1 = Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Link To Common Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Comms Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Control Panel
Dialler LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
D
Data Changed Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Daylight Saving
Australian Daylight Savings Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Template Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
14-1
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Index
DEFAULTING THE SYSTEM
Domestic Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Factory Defaulting Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Hardware Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Software Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Delay Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Delay Trouble Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Delete PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Destination 1
Account # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
TX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Destination 2
Account # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
TX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Dialler Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dialler Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
DIRECT LINK
Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Start Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Display LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Display Menu Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Domestic Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 11-4
DOOR
Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 8-3
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Unlock TimeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
DTMF Control Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 9-12
DTMF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Duress Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-11
Duress Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
E
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Emergency Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Entry Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Entry Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
EOL Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Erase User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
ETHERNET MODULE
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Subnet Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Event Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Exit Error Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exit Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit Time Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
F
Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Fault Acknowledge All Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Fault ACK Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fingerprint
14-2
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fire Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
First To Open / Last To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Fuse Options
Display +12V Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10,
Display COMM+ Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Display LAN+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report +12V Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report COMM+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report LAN+ Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
G
GSM/GPRS Module
APN Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
APN Server Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
APN Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
SMS Control Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Trigger Table 1 Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Trigger Table 2 Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
H
Handover
Non Sequential Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Pulse Count Handover Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Holidays
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Start Stop Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn Speaker
RF Beep Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
I
Ignore Trouble On Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Installer Menu Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Installer Options
Auto Exit Install 2hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Auto Exit Service 2hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Defaulting Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Multi Tenant Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Report Data Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Report Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Restrict Installer PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Installer PIN
Arm Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Change PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Enter Programming Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Installing
Connecting Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connecting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
EOL Resistor Colour Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Optional MAINS Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Panels & Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
PCB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PCB LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tamper Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Inverted Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
IP Remote Access
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
IP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
IP RAS Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
IPRS Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
IPRS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
RAS Lockout Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
IP Reporting
ACK Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Conettix NNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
IP Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Poll Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Receiver IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Receiver Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Retry Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
SIA Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Username & Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
K
KEYFOBS
Arm/Disarm Strobe Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Add Keyfob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Delete Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Test Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Keypad
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
LED Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
KEYPAD
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Emergency Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Idle Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Set Hi/Lo Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
KEYPADS & READERS
All On Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
All User Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Chime Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Disarming Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Display Area Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Display Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Egress Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Entry Exit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Extinguish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Home Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Home Area Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Installer PIN Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Lockout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Log Egress Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Part Exit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Part On Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
PIN To Change Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Reader Area Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Reader Badging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Rear Tamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Index
Report Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Show Alarm When Armed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Single Key Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Zero Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Keyswitch Tamper Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
LAN Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
LAN Secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Link To Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Lockout Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Lockout Siren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Log Credential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Log Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
M
Monitor Default PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Multi Tenant Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
MyAlarm
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Email Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Gateway Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
IP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
MyAlarm Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
N
Non Sequential Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
O
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS
Only After Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Report Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
User Options - Always Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
OUTPUTS
Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Event Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Event Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Event Types Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Output Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Output Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Output Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Output Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Time Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Turn Output On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Output Testing
External Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Internal Bell Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Strobe Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
P
Panel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Part 2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Part Entry Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
PGM Input Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
14-3
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Index
Phone Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Digital Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Phone Number Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Phone Number Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 9-4
PIN
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Always Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Change Other PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Installer PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Retry Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Retry Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Power Up
Disarmed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Same State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
PROGRAMMING
Alpha Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defaulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Entering Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Exiting Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
List Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Option Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
Auto Arming an Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Opening a Door using a Single Digit Code . . . . . . . 12-1
Opening Garage Door Using a 4 Button Keyfob . . 12-1
Operating an Output with a TimeZone. . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Sending SMS Alarm Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Unlock Door and Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . . . . 12-2
Unlock Door & Arm/Disarm Area via Reader . . . . . 12-2
Using CLI To Establish SolutionLink Connection . . 12-2
Pulse Count
Pulse Count Handover Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Pulse Count Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
R
RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
RAS Security PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
DTMF Quick Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Remote Arming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
REPORTING OPTIONS
Burg Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Emergency Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Fire Report Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
System Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Test Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
TX Format Dest 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
TX Format Dest 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Report LAN Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
RF Devices
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Delete RF Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
RF Device Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
RF Receiver Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Supervision Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
View RF ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
14-4
RF Receiver Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Ring Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
S
Senior Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Senior Watch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Sensor Watch Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Service Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Silencing Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Silent Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Silent Burglary Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Single Key
Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Off, From Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Siren Reset All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Siren / Strobe When Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Siren Swinger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Site Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Smart Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Smoke Sensor Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
SMS
Call-Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4, 9-5
SMS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
SOLUTION LINK
Call/Answer RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Call Back Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Call Back Verify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
RAS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
RAS Security PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Start Direct Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Speaker Beeps
Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Strobe Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Summertime Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Summertime On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Supervision Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Swinger Dialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Area Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Installer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
SYSTEM POWER
AC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Arming Allowed On Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Battery Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Fuse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Synchronise System Clock to AC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
System Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
System Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
T
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Telephone Number Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
TESTING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
External Siren Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Internal Siren Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14, 8-15
Send Test Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Strobe Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Walk Test All Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Test On Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Test Report
Dial Number Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-26
Send Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
TIMEZONE
Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Token
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Token Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tone Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Trouble Alert Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Turn Area Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
U
USERS
Add PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Add Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Auto Bypass Allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Bypass Zones Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Change Other PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Change Own PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Delete PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Delete Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Erase User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Expire Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
PIN Retry Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Send Open/Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
TimeZone Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
User RAS PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
User Test Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
User Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
View PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
V
View PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
View RF Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Voice Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Voice Module Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
W
Walk Test All Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14, 11-
Walk Test A Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Walk Test Options
User Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Walk Test 24Hr Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Bosch Security Systems 03/16 BLCC610I
Solution 6000
Installation Manual
Index
Walk Test Fire Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Walk Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Wi-Fi
SSID Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
WiFi Settings
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
WIRING
Board Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PCB Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Zone Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Z
Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
ZONES
Add RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Area Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Armed When Part On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Bypass Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Delete RF Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Door Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
EOL Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Input Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Input Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Inverted Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Keyswitch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
NO EOL Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Report Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sensor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Set Chime Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Set Part 2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tamper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Test On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Test RF Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Zone Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Zone Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Zone Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
14-5
Bosch Security Systems
Level 2, 21 Solent Circuit
Baulkham Hills, NSW 2153
Australia
Phone: 1300 026 724 www.boschsecurity.com.au
© 2016 Bosch Security Systems
BLCC610I
Issue FTR1.7
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project